JP2023054244A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving game properties.

SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 10 can execute a first variable display for teaching a result of a win/loss lottery based on entry of game balls to first start ball entry means, and a second variable display for teaching a result of a win/loss lottery based on entry of game balls to second start ball entry means, in parallel, and a state of the Pachinko machine is changed between a low state in which, an execution number for a prescribed time of the second variable display easily becomes small, and a high state in which the execution number may become larger than that of the low state. A second variable time determination table for high state time which is referred when the second variable time of the second variable display is determined in the high state, has a plurality of pattern corresponding tables, and determines a pattern corresponding table referred according to the result of win/loss lottery. The pattern corresponding table has a plurality of level corresponding tables in which distribution of a length of a variable time to be selected is different, and if the high state is applied, level determination processing is performed for determining any level corresponding table is referred.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a shooting means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is to be generated. The variable display means performs a variable display for teaching the result of the lottery (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-271480

In addition, in the pachinko machine, it is possible to change the ease with which game balls enter the starting ball entry means, change the probability of entering a special game state, or change the special game state that is more advantageous for the player in the special game state. Attempts have been made to diversify the playability by changing the rate at which states are selected, etc., but all of them have become monotonous, and there is a demand for more diversified playability.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving game playability.

The gaming machine of the present invention is
a game area in which a game ball shot by the shooting device is guided;
A first starting ball entering means and a second starting ball entering means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area;
a first starting ball entry detection means capable of detecting a gaming ball that has entered the first starting ball entry means;
a second starting ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the second starting ball entry means;
variable ball entry means configured to be able to change state between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can be entered and a closed state in which the ball cannot be entered;
When the detection by the first starting ball entry detection means is performed, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to generate a special game state for opening the variable ball entry means, and the winning lottery is won. a first special game generating means for generating the special game state in
a first special display means for performing a first variable display with a first special symbol for teaching the result of the winning lottery performed by the first special game generating means;
When the detection by the second starting ball entry detection means is performed, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to generate a special game state for opening the variable ball entry means, and the winning lottery is won. a second special game generating means for generating the special game state in
a second special display means for performing a second variable display with a second special symbol for teaching the result of the winning lottery performed by the second special game generating means;
The first variable display in the first special display means and the second variable display in the second special display means can be executed in parallel,
one of the first variable display and the second variable display is configured to be changeable between a low state in which the number of executions per predetermined time tends to decrease and a high state in which the number of executions tends to increase more than the low state,
a first variation time determination table referred to when determining the first variation time of the first variation display;
a second variation time determination table that is referred to when determining the second variation time of the second variation display;
The first variation time determination table includes a low state first variation time determination table that is referred to in the low state, and a high state first variation time determination table that is referred to in the high state. and
The second fluctuation time determination table includes a low state second fluctuation time determination table referred to in the low state and a high state second variation time determination table referred to in the high state. and
A plurality of pattern correspondence tables are provided in the high state first fluctuation time determination table and the high state second fluctuation time determination table, respectively, and the pattern correspondence is referred to according to the result of the lottery. configured to determine the table,
At least one of the pattern correspondence tables of the high state first fluctuation time determination table and the high state second fluctuation time determination table contains a plurality of different allocations of the length of the selected fluctuation time. A level table is provided,
A level determination that determines which of the level correspondence tables is referred to in determining the first variation time and the second variation time in the high state when the high state is granted. It is characterized in that it is configured to perform processing.

Incidentally, the gaming machine may be a pachinko machine.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve game playability.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened|released the inner frame and the front frame. It is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame, the game board, and the like. It is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, the back pack unit and the like are opened. It is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of the various counters used for game control. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows starting prize-winning processing. It is a flow chart which shows right or wrong judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows type judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows a reach determination process. 4 is a flowchart showing through gate passage processing; It is a flow chart which shows firing permission command setting processing. 9 is a flowchart showing first special display control processing; 9 is a flow chart showing a first variable display setting process; It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 determination information setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing second special display control processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second variable display setting process; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 determination information setting process. It is a flow chart which shows variable winning a prize device control processing. It is a flow chart which shows specific prize-winning processing. 9 is a flowchart showing end setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a remaining ball monitoring process. 8 is a flowchart showing normal display control processing; It is a flow chart which shows normal figure fluctuation setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure discrimination|determination information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows a start winning a prize device control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of a payout control device. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing of a sub-controller; It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of various counters used for determination of a decorative design. 10 is a flowchart showing counter update processing; It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information storage process. It is a flow chart which shows suspension processing. It is a flow chart which shows hit display processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation|variation stop process. It is a front view which shows the visual recognition aspect of a decorative pattern display apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating the specification of a pachinko machine. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a first variable time determination table; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a second fluctuation time determination table; FIG. It is a time chart for explaining the flow of the variable display in the first special display device, the second special display device, and the decorative pattern display device. It is a time chart for explaining the flow of the variable display in the first special display device, the second special display device, and the decorative pattern display device. It is a time chart for explaining the flow of the variable display in the first special display device, the second special display device, and the decorative pattern display device in another embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the specification of the pachinko machine in another embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the specifications of a pachinko machine in another embodiment, (a) showing a first rush variation time determination table, (b) showing a second rush variation time determination table, and (c) It shows the correspondence relationship between the rush level and the rush variation table. It is a time chart for explaining the flow of the variable display in the first special display device, the second special display device, and the decorative pattern display device in another embodiment.

An embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3, etc., the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 as a fixed frame that constitutes the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10. On one side of the outer frame 11, an inner frame as a game board attachment frame is provided. A frame 12 is supported so that it can be opened and closed. For the sake of convenience, FIG. 3 omits the game members (nails, accessories, etc.) provided on the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame 14 as a front frame.

As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper frame-constituting portion 11a and a lower frame-constituting portion 11b made of wooden plate material, and a left frame-constituting portion 11c and a right side frame-constituting portion 11d made of aluminum alloy by extrusion molding. These frame-constituting parts 11a to 11d are assembled into a rectangular frame as a whole by detachable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame-constituting portion 11c (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. A space formed inside the outer frame 11 accommodates the inner frame 12 and the like.

An extension wall portion 83 that protrudes toward the inner side of the outer frame 11 from the vicinity of the rear end in the width direction is formed on the right side frame-constituting portion 11d. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3 , a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked is provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 . A pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame open detection switch 92 (to be described later) protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the lower receiving portion 85 .

Further, a resin-made curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower side frame-constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 protruding upward is integrally formed in the inner part of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87 . This makes it difficult for a gap to be formed with the inner frame 12 .

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically along the left side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 38 .

A front frame 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame 14 can be opened forward about an opening/closing axis set vertically on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front. Note that the front frame 14 may be configured to be supported directly by the outer frame 11 instead of via the inner frame 12 so as to be openable.

The front frame 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers substantially the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the central portion of the front frame 14 . Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12 . A detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, on the front side of the front frame 14, a lower tray 15 is provided as a ball receiving tray at the center of the lower portion thereof. can be stored inside. Further, on the front side of the lower tray 15, a ball extracting lever 25 for ejecting game balls from the inside of the lower tray 15 is provided.

On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball shooting handle (hereinafter referred to as "handle 18") is provided as an operation means (shooting operation means) projecting forward. The handle 18 is provided with a rotary operation body 18a as a rotatably provided operation portion, and a touch detection means as a touch detection means capable of detecting that a human hand touches the handle 18 at a position not shown. A sensor and a variable resistor as operation amount detection means for detecting the operation amount of the operation portion of the handle 18 are provided. Then, when the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is shot by a shooting device 60 as a shooting means, which will be described later, with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Further, the handle 18 is provided with a stop lever 18b as a stop operation means that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. As shown in FIG. When the stop lever 18b is pressed, even if the handle 18 is gripped, the shooting device 60 is prohibited from shooting game balls. Therefore, it is possible to rotate the handle 18 while prohibiting the shooting of the game ball, or temporarily stop shooting the game ball while gripping the handle 18.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 2, above the lower tray 15, an upper tray 19 capable of storing game balls paid out from the upper payout opening 17 is provided. The upper plate 19 is a ball receiver that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a launching device 60 to be described later while aligning them in a row. When the upper tray 19 is filled with game balls, the paid out game balls are guided to the lower tray 15 via the lower tray communication passage 71 and the lower payout port 16, which will be described later.

A lending switch 121, a return switch 122, and a balance display section 124 are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. - 特許庁In a game hall or the like, when a game card with a balance is inserted (inserted) into a CR unit arranged on the (left) side of the pachinko machine 10, when the lending switch 121 is operated, Then, the rented ball is supplied to the upper tray 19. On the other hand, the return switch 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the CR unit. Also, the balance display section 124 displays how much the card inserted in the CR unit has in its balance.

Furthermore, a ball removal button 123 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19 . The ball removal button 123 is constructed so as to be retractable from the upper surface of the upper plate 19, and is always biased toward the side protruding from the upper surface of the upper plate 19 by a biasing means (not shown). By pressing the ball removing button 123, the upper tray 19 and the lower tray 15 are opened, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 19 are guided to the lower tray 15. . That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123 .

In addition, an effect button 125 and a cross button 126 as effect operation means are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19 . The production button 125 has a built-in LED, and by pressing the production button 125 or the cross button 126, the corresponding production is performed in the decorative pattern display device 42 or the like described later, or the display content is changed. do.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front surface of the front frame 14 . These light emitting means play a role of increasing the performance effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode in accordance with the change of the game state or the like. For example, on the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 containing light emitting means such as an LED is provided. In addition, error display lamps 104 are provided on both sides of the ring-shaped decorative portion 102 to light up in the event of a predetermined error. A large number of fine through-holes are formed in the ring-shaped decorative portion 102 above the error display lamps 104 so as to correspond to the speakers SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the rear surface of the front frame 14 .

A glass unit 137 is attached to the rear side of the front frame 14 . The glass unit 137 is not a conventional front and rear pair of rectangular plate glasses that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but is formed in a round shape as a whole and attached after being assembled.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 in contact with the back side of the resin base 38 on the rear side of the window hole 39 . Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 .

In addition, a launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 for guiding game balls immediately after being launched by the launching device 60 are attached to the lower front portion of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39. there is In this embodiment, a solenoid type launcher is adopted as the launcher 60 . Furthermore, above the shooting device 60, a ball feeding device guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one by one to the shooting position of the shooting device 60 by driving a built-in drive means (eg, solenoid). 63 are provided.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning device 31, a first variable winning device 32a as a variable ball winning means, a second variable winning device 32b, a first normal start winning device 33a as a first starting ball winning means, a A 1-support starting winning device 33b, a second starting winning device 33c as a second starting ball entry means, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, and the like are provided. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins a prize) into various winning ports such as the general winning device 31, the variable winning devices 32a, 32b, the starting winning devices 33a, 33b, and 33c, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper tray 19 Alternatively, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the lower tray 15.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, when there is a ball entering the first normal start-up winning device 33a and the first support start-up winning device 33b, there are three balls, and when there is a ball entering the second start-up winning device 33c is 1, 10 if a ball enters the general prize winning device 31, 10 if a ball enters the first variable prize winning device 32a, and 10 if a ball enters the second variable prize winning device 32b. It is constructed such that three game balls are paid out when there is Also, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 through which the game ball only passes (it is not discharged to the back side of the game board 30) in the game area, the game ball is not paid out.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36 corresponding to the lowest part of the game area, and game balls that do not enter various prize winning ports such as the general prize winning device 31 pass through this out port 36. It passes through and is discharged outside the game area. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a large number of nails (game nails) for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls, as well as various members (accessories) such as windmills. ing.

Although details will be described later, the first normal start winning device 33a, the first support start winning device 33b, and the second start winning device 33c include first start winning ball detection means for detecting a winning game ball. A first normal start winning switch 224a, a first support starting winning switch 224b, and a second starting winning switch 224c serving as second start winning ball detection means are provided. The game ball enters the first normal start winning device 33a as the first start ball entry means and the first support start prize winning device 33b, the first normal start winning switch 224a as the first start ball detection means, When the game ball is detected by the first support start-up winning switch 224b, the first winning lottery (big winning lottery) for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot state as a special game state in which the first variable winning device 32a is opened. etc. are performed, and a variable display is performed by a first special display device 43a, which will be described later. Then, when winning the first lottery, a big winning state is awarded.

Also, when the game ball enters the second start winning device 33c as the second start winning ball means and the game ball is detected by the second start winning prize switch 224c as the second start winning ball detection means, A first win/fail lottery and a second win/fail lottery (small win lottery) for determining whether or not to generate a small win state in which the second variable prize winning device 32b is opened are performed, and a second special display device 43b, which will be described later. The variable display is performed at . When winning the first lottery, a big winning state is awarded, and when winning the second winning lottery, a small winning state is awarded.

A variable display device unit 35 is arranged in substantially the center of the game area. A center frame 47 is arranged in the variable display device unit 35 so as to surround a decorative design display device 42 which will be described later. The left part of the center frame 47 is provided with a ball entrance 151 into which a game ball can enter. It is guided onto a stage 153 formed below the decorative design display device 42 via a warp flow path 152 extending vertically along the left side of the device 42 . A guide groove 154 extending in the front-rear direction and inclined downward toward the front is provided in the central part of the stage 153, and the game ball guided by the guide groove 154 has a relatively high probability as compared with the game ball not guided. , a first normal start winning device 33a, which will be described later.

Below the variable display device unit 35, a first normal start winning device 33a is arranged. The first normal starting winning device 33a is provided so as to protrude forward from the front part of the game board 30, and a winning opening (starting winning opening) in which game balls can always win is opened on the upper side thereof. Incidentally, the first normal starting winning device 33a of the present embodiment is not provided with a configuration for changing the ease with which a game ball enters the first normal starting winning device 33a.

A first variable prize winning device 32a is provided on the right side of the first normal start prize winning device 33a and at a slightly lower position. The first variable winning device 32a includes a large winning opening leading to the rear of the game board 30, a shutter for opening and closing the large winning opening, a large winning opening solenoid for operating the shutter, and a game in which a ball enters the large winning opening. Equipped with a count switch 223a for detecting a ball, the first variable winning device 32a (big winning opening) is switched between a closed state and an open state by driving and controlling a large winning opening solenoid to open and close the shutter.

The first variable winning device 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter, and is in an open state in which game balls can win in the event of a big win. In the first variable prize winning device 32a of the present embodiment, the bottom edge of the big prize shutter is rotatably supported along the bottom edge of the big prize opening. In the closed state of the device 32a, the large winning shutter extends up and down to block the large winning opening, and the game ball can pass in front of the large winning shutter. On the other hand, in the open state of the first variable prize winning device 32a, the big prize winning shutter rotates forward and extends back and forth (the upper surface is slightly downwardly inclined toward the rear), and flows down in front of the big prize winning opening. A game ball is received by the rear surface (upper surface) of the big winning shutter and guided to the big winning opening.

A first support starting winning device 33b is provided in a region (right side region) located on the right side of the variable display device unit 35 in the game region. The first support start-up winning device 33b includes a pair of wing members 37 that are rotatably displaceable adjacent to both left and right sides of a winning opening into which game balls can enter (starting winning opening). In this embodiment, when the blade members 37 are in the closed position extending vertically, there is no room for the game ball to pass between the tips of the pair of blade members 37 and the game nail, and the first support The starting winning device 33b is in a closed state in which it is impossible to enter a game ball. On the other hand, when the blade member 37 changes to the open position in which it opens outward, the first support starting prize winning device 33b secures a gap for the game ball to pass between the blade member 37 and the game nail to allow the game ball to enter. While the ball is allowed, the game ball moving on the side of the first support start winning device 33b is guided by the blade member 37 to the start winning opening of the first support start winning device 33b (the game ball enters easier).

A second start-up prize device 33c is provided above the first support start-up prize device 33b. The second starting winning device 33c is provided so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the game board 30, and a winning opening (starting winning opening) in which game balls can always win is opened on the upper side thereof. It should be noted that the second start-up winning device 33c of the present embodiment is not provided with a configuration for changing the ease with which a game ball enters the first normal start-up winning device 33a.

However, in this embodiment, the game nail is configured to guide the game ball moving on the upper right side of the second start-up winning device 33c to the second start-up winning device 33c side, and the first normal start-up winning device Compared to 33a, it is constructed so that a game ball can enter relatively easily. The configuration for increasing the ease of entry of the game ball into the second start winning device 33c is not particularly limited. It may be configured to

A through gate 34 through which game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one is provided above the second starting prize winning device 33c. The through gate 34 has a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34, which will be described later in detail. In this embodiment, the through gate 34 is not provided in the area (right side area) located on the right side of the variable display unit 35 in the game area.

In addition, when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball entry support lottery (open lottery) is performed to determine whether or not the first support start winning device 33b is to be opened, and a normal symbol to be described later. A variable display is performed on the display device 41 to teach the result of the entrance support lottery. Then, when winning the ball-entering support lottery, the first support start winning device 33b is opened for a specified time after the end of the variable display.

A second variable winning device 32b is provided in the lower right portion of the center frame 47, in this example, above the first support starting winning device 33b and below the second starting winning device 33c. The second variable winning device 32b of the present embodiment includes a specific area 141 into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, an opening/closing member 143 that opens and closes a ball entry opening 142 serving as an entrance to the specific area 141, A solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the opening/closing member 143 is provided, and the solenoid is controlled to open/close the opening/closing member 143, thereby switching the second variable winning device 32b between the closed state and the open state. The second variable winning device 32b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter, and is in an open state in which a game ball can enter in a small winning state.

The opening/closing member 143 of the present embodiment is rotatably supported around a shaft portion (not shown) extending in the front-rear direction at the lower portion of the ball entry opening portion 142 to close the second variable winning device 32b. In this state, the opening/closing member 143 extends vertically to close the ball entry opening 142 . On the other hand, in the open state of the second variable winning device 32b, the opening/closing member 143 opens to the right (the upper surface is inclined slightly upward toward the right), and flows down to the right of the second variable winning device 32b. A game ball is received by the back surface (upper surface) of the opening/closing member 143 and guided to the ball entry opening 142 .

In addition, the second variable winning device 32b includes an entering ball count switch 226 that can detect all game balls entering the specific area 141, and a game that enters the specific area 141 and is detected by the entering ball count switch 226. A specific ball entry section 145 that allows a ball to enter, a non-specific ball entry section 146, a specific ball entry detection switch 223b that detects a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry section 145, and a non-specific ball entry section 146 A sorting device that guides a game ball detected by a non-specific ball entry detection switch 223c for detecting a game ball that has entered and a game ball detected by a ball entry count switch 226 to either a specific ball entry section 145 or a non-specific ball entry section 146. 149.

The sorting device 149 includes a slide bar 149a that displaces between a closed position that restricts the ball from entering the specific ball-entering section 145 and an open position that allows the ball to enter the specific ball-entering section 145, and a slide bar 149a that is displaced at predetermined intervals. and a solenoid (not shown) that displaces 149a to the open position. If the slide bar 149a is in the open position when the game ball entering the specific area 141 reaches the sorting device 149, the game ball enters the specific ball entering section 145, and the slide bar 149a is in the closed position. Then, the game ball enters the non-specific ball entering section 146 .

Then, when a small winning state occurs, when the game ball entering the specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b enters the specific ball entering portion 145, the first variable winning device 32a is opened. It is designed to generate a jackpot condition. In this embodiment, the number of game balls entering the specific ball entering section 145 is configured to be approximately 1/40 of the number of entering balls in the second variable winning device 32b.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if a game ball is detected by the first normal start winning switch 224a and the first support starting winning switch 224b, the second lottery is not performed. Also, in a game state other than the second support state, even if a game ball enters the specific area 141 of the second variable prize winning device 32b, the slide bar 149a of the sorting device 149 is in the closed position and the specific ball entering portion 145 (the timing at which the game ball entered when the opening/closing member 143 is opened does not match the timing at which the slide bar 149a is at the open position). .

In addition, the blade member 37 of the first support start-up winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently, and a "high ball entry state" in which the game ball is easily entered into the first support start-up prize device 33b. There is also a "low ball entry state" in which the time zone in which the blade member 37 is open is reduced.

In addition, as the high ball entry state, for example, (1) a state in which the fluctuation display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low ball entry state, (2) one opening time of the first support start winning device 33b (3) The specified number of game balls that can be entered per opening of the first support start winning device 33b is larger than that in the low ball entry state. State, (4) A state in which the number of times the first support start winning device 33b is opened per winning of the ball entry support lottery is greater than in the low ball entry state, (5) The winning probability of the ball entry support lottery is low. For example, it is set to a state higher than the state. The high ball entry state in this embodiment employs the configurations (1) and (2) above. Of course, not limited to this, any one of the configurations (1) to (5), or any combination of the configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the "high ball entry state". .

Now, in this embodiment, the variable display of the first special display device 43a (hereinafter referred to as "first variable display") and the variable display of the second special display device 43b (hereinafter referred to as "second variable display") ), even if one variable display is being performed, the other variable display can be started and both variable displays can be executed in parallel. However, if one of the first variable display and the second variable display is performing a variable display corresponding to a big win, the other variable display is configured not to start (the other variable display display can be stopped). Furthermore, if one of the first variation display and the second variation display is stopped in a manner that teaches a big win or a small win, the other is forced to correspond to "off" is configured to stop display (forcibly terminate), and after the end of the jackpot or small hit state, the following (first special fluctuation holding area and second special fluctuation holding area to be described later) Each holding The first variable display (stored in the first area) and the second variable display are configured to start. That is, when one of the first variable display and the second variable display performs a stop display in a manner that teaches a big win or a small win, the other variable display is erased (regardless of the content). The Rukoto.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting of the variation time of the first variable display (hereinafter referred to as "first variation time") and the variation time of the second variable display (hereinafter referred to as "second variation time") , the length of the second variation time for one time is set longer than the sum of the lengths of the first variation times for multiple times, and the length of the first variation time for one time is configured to be changeable between a "second variation state" set longer than the sum of the lengths of the second variation times for a plurality of times.

As shown in FIG. 47, the first variable time determination table referred to when setting the first variable time includes a first middle variable time determination table, a first short variable time determination table, and a first long variable time determination table. With tables. In addition, in each of the first middle fluctuation time determination table and the first short fluctuation time determination table, there are "for jackpot with rush", "for jackpot with time reduction", "for front and back reach", and "for reach other than front and back". ”, and “for losing” are provided, and the first long fluctuation time determination table is provided with “for normal” and “for big win”.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 48, the second variable time determination table referred to when setting the second variable time includes a second short variable time determination table and a second long variable time determination table. . In addition, the second short fluctuation time determination table is provided with "for big win" and "for small win", and the second long fluctuation time determination table is provided with "for normal" and "for big win". is provided.

In other words, the setting time for the fluctuation display by the first middle fluctuation time determination table is basically 8 seconds to 35 seconds (except for premium reach, which will be described later), and the setting time for the fluctuation display by the first short fluctuation time determination table is basic. Typically 4 to 20 seconds, the set time for the variable display by the second short variable time determination table is 4 to 20 seconds, while the set time for the variable display by the first long variable time determination table is 120 minutes or more. 360 minutes, and the setting time of the variable display by the second long variable time determination table is 200 to 500 minutes. Therefore, in one of the first variable display and the second variable display, the variable display set with reference to the long variable time determination table (hereinafter also referred to as "long variable display") is performed once. On the other hand, on the other hand, the variable display set with reference to the short variable time determination table (hereinafter also referred to as "short variable display") and the variable display set with reference to the middle variable time determination table (hereinafter referred to as Also called "middle fluctuation display") is basically performed many times. It is highly likely that it will not be displayed. In this embodiment, when setting the first variable time, the first middle variable time determination table or the first short variable time determination table is referred to, and when setting the second variable time, the second long variable time determination table is referred to. The referenced state corresponds to the first variation state. On the other hand, a state in which the first long variation time determination table is referred to when setting the first variation time and the second short variation time determination table is referred to when setting the second variation time corresponds to the second variation state. do.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as a normal game state in which the special symbol display devices 43a and 43b perform variable display, a low ball entry state and a "normal mode" as a normal game state which is the first variable state, "Time saving mode" as a first support gaming state that is a high ball count state and a first variation state, and "Rush mode" as a second support gaming state that is a high ball count state and a second variation state. and are set.

As shown in FIG. 46(c), in the present embodiment, the winning probability in the entrance support lottery is the same in any game mode out of the normal mode, the time saving mode, and the rush mode (for example, 27/30 ). However, the fluctuation display time (ordinary pattern fluctuation time) in the normal pattern display device 41 is 60 seconds in the normal mode, and is 0.4 seconds in the time saving mode and the rush mode. In addition, the opening time (support opening time) of the first support start winning device 33b when winning the entrance support lottery is 0.2 seconds x 2 times in normal mode, and 1 in time saving mode and rush mode. .8 seconds×2 times. As a result, in the time saving mode and the rush mode, the game balls are likely to frequently win against the first support starting prize winning device 33b, and the decrease in the number of balls possessed by the player is suppressed, resulting in a good ball holding state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 46(a), the winning probability in the first lottery is the same (for example, 1/240) in any game mode out of the normal mode, the time saving mode, and the rush mode. ing. In the normal mode, the first variable display is set to middle variable display, and the second variable display is set to long variable display. In the time saving mode, the first variable display is set to the short variable display, and the second variable display is set to the long variable display. In the rush mode, the first variable display is set to long variable display and the second variable display is set to short variable display.

Furthermore, the winning probability in the second lottery is the same in any of the normal mode, the time saving mode, and the rush mode, and when the second variable display is performed, the winning is almost the same. The probability is, for example, 239/240; if the player does not win the first lottery performed based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33c, the player wins the second lottery. However, as described above, in the normal mode and the time saving mode, the second variation display is set as a long variation display, so that the small hit state based on the result of the second winning lottery rarely occurs It's becoming Moreover, when a small win state occurs, the second variable prize winning device 32b is opened, and the small win opening time is 1.6 seconds and 0.1 seconds in the rush mode. is performed, in the normal mode and the time saving mode, the release of 0.1 seconds is performed only twice.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the normal mode continues until the big win state occurs, whereas the time saving mode and the rush mode are the first in the special display devices 43a and 43b even if the big win state does not occur. When the variable display and the second variable display are performed a predetermined number of times (in this example, both the time saving mode and the rush mode are 70 times in total), the display ends and the normal mode is entered. ing.

In addition, as the jackpot types of this embodiment, a jackpot with a 15-round rush (hereinafter referred to as “15RS”), a jackpot with an 8-round rush (hereinafter referred to as “8RS”), and a jackpot with an 8-round short time (hereinafter “8RN ”). The first variable winning device 32a is opened for 30 seconds, or the entry of 8 game balls into the first variable winning device 32a is defined as one round. Then, for "8RS" and "8RN", after repeating eight times, the jackpot state ends. In addition, after the jackpot states of "15RS" and "8RS" are completed, a "rush mode" is provided, and after the jackpot state of "8RN" is completed, a "time-saving mode" is provided. .

As shown in FIG. 46(a), in the present embodiment, a jackpot is won in the first winning lottery performed based on the ball entering the first normal starting winning device 33a and the first supporting starting winning device 33b. 30% to "8RS" and 70% to "8RN". On the other hand, if the jackpot is won in the second lottery performed based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33c, 30% for "15RS", 35% for "8RS", and "8RN". are distributed at a rate of 35%. That is, compared to the case of winning the jackpot in the first lottery, the ratio of the rush mode to be provided is higher in the case of winning the jackpot in the second lottery, which is advantageous for the player. there is

Also, the type of the big win state generated based on the ball entering the specific ball entering section 145 is determined when the small win is won in the second lottery. In other words, when a small prize is won, it is configured to distribute 30% to "15RS", 35% to "8RS", and 35% to "8RN". However, in the first round in the winning state when a small win is won, the second variable winning device 32b is opened, and the game ball entering the open second variable winning device 32b is specified. By entering the ball into the ball entering portion 145, the first variable prize winning device 32a is opened in the second and subsequent rounds to continue the big winning state. Therefore, when the small winning state ends without the game ball entering the specific ball entering portion 145, the big winning state is not provided, and therefore the game mode is changed after the big winning state. It seems that there is no

In this embodiment, the game balls moving in the left side area of the game area can reach the first normal start winning device 33a, but the game balls moving in the right side area cannot (almost) reach it. . For this reason, in the normal mode, the game ball is hit to the left side area, which is called "left hitting". On the other hand, in the time-saving mode in which the ball can be expected to enter the first support start winning device 33b arranged in the right side area, "right hitting" is performed to hit the game ball to the right side area. Further, in the rush mode in which game balls are sequentially entered into the second starting prize winning device 33c arranged in the right side area, the second variable display can be digested at a good tempo, and "right hitting" is performed. In addition, since the first variable prize winning device 32a and the second variable prize winning device 32b, which are opened in the jackpot state, are arranged in the lower part of the right side region, "right hitting" is possible even in the jackpot state. It will be done.

By the way, even if you hit right in the normal mode, the second variation time is remarkably long. Even though it is easier to hit the ball, not all the game balls hit right-handed enter the ball, and the number of prize balls is one. Furthermore, the ball cannot be expected to enter the first support start-up prize device 33b or the first normal start-up prize device 33a, and therefore the first variable display is not performed. For this reason, for example, in the normal mode, it is assumed that the game ball is hit to the left side area "left hit", and guidance is provided to the player. It is possible to avoid a situation in which unfairness arises between a player who does it and a player who does not because it becomes advantageous in progressing.

In addition, adjacent to the upper right part of the substantially elliptical game area, as a normal display means for performing a variable display for teaching the result of the ball entry support lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 The normal symbol display device 41, the first normal start winning device 33a, and the first support start winning device 33b The fluctuation display for teaching the result of the first success or failure lottery performed with the entry of the game ball to the first support start winning device 33b 1st special display device 43a as the first special display means in which is performed, the results of the first winning lottery and the second winning lottery that are triggered by the entry of the game ball to the second start winning device 33c A second special display device 43b as second special display means for performing variable display for teaching is provided so as to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first normal starting prize winning device 33a and the first support starting prize winning device 33b during the execution of the first variable display, the ball enters the game ball. The first variable display corresponding to is retained and stored, and after the first variable display being executed is stopped and displayed, the retained and stored first variable display is started. Further, when a game ball enters the second starting prize winning device 33c during execution of the second variable display, the second variable display corresponding to the entered ball is retained and stored, and the second variable display during execution is stored. After the stop display of the variable display, the reserved second variable display is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34 during the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display corresponding to the passage is retained and stored, and after the variable display being executed is stopped and displayed. , the suspended and stored variable display is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first variable display is retained and stored so as to be adjacent to the normal symbol display device 41, the first special display device 43a, and the second special display device 43b. a first pending display device 46a as a first pending display means for indicating that the user has acquired the right to execute, and a second pending display as a second pending display means for indicating that the second variable display is stored pending A device 46b and a normal holding display device 44 for indicating that the variable display in the normal symbol display device 41 is held and stored are provided. In this embodiment, the first special display device 43a, the second special display device 43b, the first reservation display device 46a, the second reservation display device 46b, the normal symbol display device 41, and the normal reservation display device 44 will be described later. The display is directly controlled by the main controller 261 as main control means.

The first special display device 43a is composed of four LEDs (first special lamps). Then, with the entry of the game ball into the first normal start winning device 33a and the first support start winning device 33b as a trigger, the switching display of the first special figure lamp (first variation display) is performed.

The second special display device 43b is composed of four LEDs (second special lamps). Then, the switching display (second variable display) of the second special figure lamp is performed on the second special display device 43b triggered by the entry of the game ball to the second starting prize winning device 33c.

Further, after the first variable display and the second variable display are performed for a predetermined time on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, based on the result of the first lottery or the second lottery, the second The 1st and 2nd variable displays are stopped. That is, the lighting mode (combination of the special lamps that are lit) when the first and second variable displays are stopped is associated with various results of the first or second lottery, and the first And depending on the lighting mode when the second variable display stops, the result of the first or second win/fail lottery, that is, "big win", "small win", or "loss" is definitely displayed. It's like

Furthermore, in the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, depending on the lighting mode (stop mode) to be stopped, the jackpot type, that is, "15RS", "8RS", and "8RN" You will also be taught if there are any. In addition, there are not one but a plurality of stop modes of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b that respectively teach various types of big wins, small wins, and failures, and one of them is selected. is stopped and displayed.

In addition, the stop display on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b is configured to be maintained for a specified time, and after the specified time (after the variation interval), the next variable display can be started. It is Furthermore, after the stop display on the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b, even if the specified time elapses, if the next variable display is not performed, the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b The special display device 43b is configured to switch from a lighting mode indicating the result of the lottery to a lighting mode indicating a standby state in which variable display is not performed. It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the lighting mode indicating the result of the lottery is maintained as it is.

The first suspension display device 46a is composed of two LEDs (first suspension lamps). In this embodiment, the first variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the first normal starting prize winning device 33a and the first support starting prize winning device 33b can be retained and stored up to four times. For example, when the first variable display is suspended for one time, the first suspended lamp on the left side (inner peripheral side of the game area) lights up, and when the first variable display is suspended for two times, the left and right When the first suspension lamp of lights up and the first fluctuation display is suspended three times, the first suspension lamp on the left side blinks, the first suspension lamp on the right side lights up, and the first variation display is When the 4 times are reserved, the left and right first reserved lamps blink. When a plurality of first variable displays are reserved and stored, the first variable displays are sequentially digested in the order in which they are reserved and stored (from the first reserved one).

The second suspension display device 46b is composed of one LED (second suspension lamp). In the present embodiment, the second variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize winning device 33c is configured so that it can be retained and stored up to one time.

In addition, when game balls newly win prizes in the starting prize winning devices 33a, 33b, and 33c during the jackpot state, the fluctuation display for that amount is also suspended. In this embodiment, "right hitting" is performed in all jackpot states (in this example, all jackpots are jackpots with 8 or more rounds of balls), and a second Since the starting prize winning device 33c is configured so that game balls can enter relatively easily, basically, after the jackpot state ends, the second variable display is retained and stored.

The normal symbol display device 41 is composed of two LEDs (normal symbol lamps). Then, in the normal symbol display device 41, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, for example, the normal symbol lamp on the right side (the outer peripheral side of the game area) blinks (is displayed in a variable manner). there is Further, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the entrance support lottery. In other words, the lighting mode when the variable display stops (the combination of the normal map lamps that are lit) and the various results of the ball support lottery are associated, and depending on the lighting mode when the variable display stops , The result of the entry support lottery is displayed deterministically. For example, by lighting both the left and right general pattern lamps, it indicates "winning", and by lighting only the left general pattern lamp, it indicates "off".

The normal hold display device 44 is composed of two LEDs (normal hold lamps). In this embodiment, up to four variable displays of the normal symbol display device 41 performed based on the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 can be retained and stored. For example, when the variation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is suspended for one time, the normal suspension lamp on the left side (inner circumference side of the game area) lights up, and when it is suspended for two times, the left and right normal When the suspension lamp lights up and is suspended for 3 times, the normal suspension lamp on the left blinks and the normal suspension lamp on the right lights up, and when it is suspended for 4 times, the normal suspension lamps on the left and right flashes. Incidentally, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the jackpot state, the variation display for that amount is also suspended.

Further, the variable display device unit 35 is provided with a decorative pattern display device 42 which is constituted by a liquid crystal display device and serves as effect display means capable of displaying decorative patterns. The decorative design display device 42 is configured to perform a performance variation display (decorative design is variably displayed) as a variation corresponding performance display in accordance with the variation display by the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b. there is Furthermore, the display contents of the decorative pattern display device 42 are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 42, based on the command from the main controller 261, by the sub-controller 262 so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b Auxiliary display contents are determined, and display is performed by the display control device 45 based on the determination.

The decorative pattern display device 42 is provided with, for example, three upper, middle and lower pattern display regions (upper pattern display region, middle pattern display region, and lower pattern display region), and a plurality of types of decorations are displayed in each pattern display region. Designs (for example, numerical patterns with numbers 1 to 9) are sequentially displayed (variably displayed), and then sequentially for each design display area (eg, upper design display area → lower design display area → middle design display In the order of the area) the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. For example, when the main controller 261 confirms the occurrence of the big win, the first or second special display devices 43a and 43b display corresponding to the big win, and the decorative pattern display device 42 shows the big win. (for example, in the upper pattern display area, the middle pattern display area, and the lower pattern display area, the same decorative patterns are stopped and displayed so as to line up on a predetermined effective line), and the jackpot state is started.

In addition, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to a big win, as a preliminary step, for example, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. It will be done. In this way, the state in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area and the variable display is still performed in the middle symbol display area is the ready-to-win state. Of course, the occurrence of the reach state does not necessarily mean that the jackpot will be won, and there are cases where the win is lost.

In this embodiment, after the ready-to-win state occurs, in the middle symbol display area, the same decorative symbol (ready-to-win symbol) stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area is stopped and displayed on the same active line. When it is done (when double eyes are displayed stopped), a jackpot state is given. In addition, in the case of odd numbers, "15RS" or "8RS" occurs, and in the case of even numbers, "15RS", "8RS", and "8RN" Occur.

In this embodiment, a plurality of stages (with different backgrounds, etc.) are prepared in the decorative pattern display device 42 as effects for teaching or suggesting the game mode in which the player is staying. More specifically, the “rush stage” confirms that you are staying in rush mode, the “normal stage” confirms that you are staying in normal mode, and suggests that you are staying in short-time mode. There is a "pull-back stage" that In other words, when "15RS" is won, the game shifts to the "probability variable stage" after the jackpot state ends. In addition, when "8RS" is won and the decorative pattern display device 42 does not display a variable display or a display that teaches "8RS" in the jackpot state, or "8RN" , after the jackpot state is over, it shifts to the "pull-back stage" (in the case of the rush mode, it may be changed to the probability variable stage on the way). When the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b is performed 70 times in the pullback stage or the rush stage, the stage shifts to the "normal stage".

Further, in this embodiment, the first variable display and the second variable display are performed in parallel, but the decorative pattern display device 42 basically derives the effect variable display corresponding to both at the same time. Instead, it is designed to derive the effect variation display corresponding to one.

That is, in the normal mode and the time saving mode, the second fluctuation time is extremely long, and even when the player ends the game in the normal mode, there is a possibility that the second fluctuation display is still fluctuating. Therefore, in the normal mode and the time saving mode, basically, the first variable effect display corresponding to the first variable display is derived, and the second variable effect display corresponding to the second variable display is not derived. ing.

On the other hand, in the rush mode, the first fluctuation time is extremely long, so basically the first fluctuation display is not stopped in the rush mode. For this reason, in the rush mode, even if the first variable effect display corresponding to the first variable display that is not stopped is displayed, it only makes it difficult to understand the second variable effect display. Specifically, the second variable effect display corresponding to the second variable display is derived, and the first variable effect display corresponding to the first variable display is not derived.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the rush mode, a small winning state occurs frequently, and game characteristics such as aiming to generate a big winning state by entering a game ball into the specific ball entering section 145 of the second variable winning device 32b. Therefore, basically, the decorative pattern indicating whether or not the player has won the big win in the first lottery is not displayed. Alternatively, a simple display may be used to teach the winning of a small prize, or the teaching may be performed in the light emission mode of the lamp or the voice mode, and the decorative pattern display device 42 may be displayed in response to the completion of the second variable display. , it is also possible to simply update the count display of the remaining number of times in the rush mode. In addition, when a big win is won in the second variable display, a decorative pattern is displayed as the second effect variable display, and the combination of the big win patterns is stopped and displayed.

Although it will be described later in detail, as a special case of the first effect variation display derived by the decorative pattern display device 42 and the second effect variation display, even in the normal mode or the time saving mode, the second effect corresponding to the big hit When the variable display is performed, the second variable time determination table for the jackpot (see FIG. 48(p)) is referred to when setting the second variable time, and the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the second variable display corresponding to the second variable display. 2 effect variation display is derived. That is, in the present embodiment, when one of the first variable display and the second variable display is performing a variable display in which a big win is taught, the other variable display is not newly started. . For this reason, for example, when the second variation display corresponds to the jackpot and the second variation display is set to the long variation, until the second variation display is stopped (the jackpot state ends) until), the first variable display cannot be performed, and the game will be delayed (must be reset). Therefore, even in the normal mode or the time saving mode, when the second variation display corresponding to the big hit is performed, it is set as the short variation display. However, due to the fact that the second variable display corresponding to the big hit is performed in the normal mode or the time saving mode, the second effect variable display performed as an exception in the decorative symbol display device 42 is the same as the first effect variable display. In such a manner, it is impossible to distinguish between the first variable effect display and the second variable effect display.

Furthermore, even in the rush mode, when the first variation display corresponding to the jackpot is performed, the first variation time determination table for the jackpot (see FIG. 47(l)) is referred to when setting the first variation time, It is designed to be set as a short fluctuation display. The decorative symbol display device 42 derives the first effect variable display corresponding to the first variable display. However, the first variable effect display in the rush mode has the same aspect as the second variable effect display, and it is impossible to distinguish between the first variable effect display and the second variable effect display. there is

Further, in the present embodiment, the decoration symbol display device 42 also teaches that the first variable display is suspended in the normal mode and the time saving mode. For example, as shown in FIG. 45, in the lower part of the decorative design display device 42 (suspension display area 462), a suspension icon 461 indicating that the variable display is stored is displayed. On the other hand, the fact that the second variable display is suspended is not taught by the decorative symbol display device 42 in any game mode. The pattern display device 42 is configured not to teach.

A general winning device 31 is arranged along the periphery of the game area in the lower part of the left side area. The general prize winning device 31 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game board 30, and has a prize winning opening in which game balls can always win prizes.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a rail 50 which is composed of an inner rail forming part 51 and an outer rail forming part 52 and guides the game ball shot from the shooting device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30 . As a result, the game ball shot with the rotating operation of the handle 18 is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the shooting rails 61 and 50 .

A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail constituting portion 51 . As a result, the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area is prevented from returning into the rail 50 again. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to substantially the tip portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail constituting portion 52 . A game ball shot with a force greater than or equal to a predetermined amount hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion side of the game board 30 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the outer rail forming part 52 ends at the upper right part of the game board 30 and the inner rail forming part 51 ends at the lower right part of the game board 30 . Therefore, the play area is defined by the rails 50 and the inner peripheral surfaces of the window holes 39 of the resin base 38 . However, since the game ball hit by the shooting device 60 may flow backward on the rail 50 until it passes the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel parts of the inner and outer rail constituent parts 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. be killed.

As shown in FIG. 3 , a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame 14 below the window portion 101 . The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray communication path 71 that connects from a later-described payout mechanism 352 to the lower outlet 16 of the lower tray 15 and an upper tray communication path 73 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the upper tray 19 . In addition, there is a gap of a predetermined distance between the launch rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame 14 has the gap A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the game ball that has fallen further to the lower tray 15.例文帳に追加As a result, if a game ball shot from the shooting device 60 does not reach the return-ball prevention member 53 and travels back along the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball passes through the foul ball passage 72 to the lower tray 15. Ejected.

Furthermore, a shot ball passage 74 is provided for communicating between the upper tray 19 and the ball feeding device 63 and for guiding the game balls stored in the upper tray 19 to the ball feeding device 63 . In addition, a communicating hole (not shown) that communicates with the lower dish communicating path 71 is formed in the shot ball passage 74 (which may be the downstream portion of the upper dish 19), and a first shutter (not shown) that opens and closes the communicating hole is formed. not shown) are provided. The first shutter is normally urged toward the closed position, which closes the communication hole, by an urging means (not shown). Further, the first shutter is interlocked with the ball extractor button 123, and is configured to be displaced to the open position for opening the communication hole when the ball extractor button 123 is pressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the lower tray 15 is formed with an outlet 15a through which the game balls stored in the lower tray 15 can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and the outlet 15a is A second shutter 15b that opens and closes is provided. The second shutter 15b is normally urged toward the closed position to close the discharge port 15a by an urging means (not shown). Further, the second shutter 15b is configured to interlock with the ball extracting lever 25 (for example, is connected or integrally formed), and when the ball extracting lever 25 is pressed (to the left), is configured to be displaced to an open position for opening the discharge port 15a.

Reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 denotes a payout passage for guiding game balls paid out by a payout mechanism 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12. The upper tray communication passage 73 (upper tray 19) and a passage leading to the lower tray communication passage 71 (lower tray 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the urging force of a spring or the like to substantially close the outlet of the payout passage 67. there is Further, when the front frame 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the inlet-side rear end of the lower tray communication passage 71 . The inlets (ball inlets) of the lower tray communicating path 71 and the upper tray communicating path 73 are adjacent to each other, and when the front frame 14 is closed, the inlets and the dispensing path 67 are separated by a predetermined distance. A game ball can pass through the gap between them. Therefore, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication path 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow to the lower tray communication path 71 side (overflow to the entrance side of the lower tray communication path 71), and the lower tray connection It will be dispensed to the lower tray 15 through the passage 71 .

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting game balls positioned in the lower tray communication passage 71 . Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is grasped that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and that the game balls are staying in the lower tray communication passage 71). be able to. In this embodiment, based on the detection of game balls continuously for a predetermined period of time by the full detection switch, an error notification is provided to teach that the lower tray 15 is full by using the display or sound on the decorative pattern display device 42. is controlled. In addition, when the retention of the game ball in the lower tray communication passage 71 is eliminated and the game ball is no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game ball is no longer detected continuously for a predetermined time), the error notification state is canceled.

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, and some of them are arranged so as to be overlapped in the front and back, and a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls. and a resin protective cover, etc. are attached. Since the dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally called the back pack, the unit is called "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the rear configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the rear side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) disposed corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover covering the center frame 47 from behind is provided. 213 is provided so as to protrude rearward. In addition, on the rear side of the frame cover 213, the decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45, and the sub-control device 262 can be attached and detached in a stacked state. attached to the

The decorative pattern display device 42 is housed in a storage box 42a having an opening for exposing the display portion (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative pattern display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is attached to the rear surface of the frame cover 213. fixed on the side. The display control device 45 is housed in a substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative pattern display device 42 (housing box 42a). The sub-controller 262 is accommodated in a substrate box 262a and fixed to the rear side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). An LED control board or the like for driving the LED or the like built in the center frame 47 is arranged inside the frame cover 213 . The storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning device 31, the first variable winning device 32a, the first normal starting winning device 33, etc. from behind. . The back frame set 215 is provided with a ball recovery mechanism (not shown) for recovering game balls that have entered various winning slots. The game balls collected by this ball collecting mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 which will be described later, and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from a discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 .

Also, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261 . More specifically, a substrate box 263 in which a main controller 261 is mounted is rotatably pivoted to the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

The main controller 261 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and these box base and box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with ball entry detection switches for detecting game balls entering the various prize winning openings corresponding to the various prize winning openings of the general prize winning device 31 and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning device 31, a count switch 223a is provided in the first variable winning device 32a, and a second variable winning device is provided. The device 32b is provided with a ball entry count switch 226, a specific ball entry detection switch 223b, and a non-specific ball entry detection switch 223c. The first normal start prize winning device 33a, the first support start prize winning device 33b, and the second start prize winning device 33c include a first normal start prize winning switch 224a, a first support start prize winning switch 224b, and a second starting prize winning device 33c. A winning switch 224c is provided. Furthermore, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34 .

Although not shown, the back frame set 215 includes a general winning switch 221, a count switch 223a, a ball count switch 226, a specific ball detection switch 223b, a non-specific ball detection switch 223c, and a through gate switch. 225 and a first panel relay board electrically connected via a cable connector. This first board relay board relays the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main controller 261, and is electrically connected to the main controller 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the first normal start prize switch 224a, the first support start prize switch 224b, and the second start prize switch 224c are directly connected to the main controller 261 via connector cables without passing through the relay board. .

The detection results detected by the various incoming ball detection switches are taken into the main controller 261 . Then, a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation of each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and based on the output signal from the payout control device 311, a predetermined number of game balls is sent. is paid out (unless detected by through gate switch 225).

In addition, although not shown, on the back side of the game board 30, there is a large winning opening solenoid for opening the large winning opening of the first variable winning device 32a, and a blade member 37 of the second starting winning device 33c. A solenoid or the like is provided. Further, the back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board surface relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and motors and the main controller 261 .

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is formed by integrating a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352 . The back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about an opening/closing axis extending in the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external terminal plate 240 is provided on the upper left portion of the back pack unit 203 (upper right portion in FIG. 5).

The external terminal board 240 is for relaying transmission of various kinds of information to a game hall computer or the like, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. Terminals for outputting, for example, information on the current gaming state (occurrence of a jackpot state, occurrence of a jackpot state in which a rush mode is given, fluctuation start, various information indicating a winning state, etc.) , a terminal for outputting information on the opening of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 detected by the opening detection switches 91 and 92 described later, ball entry error, lower tray full error, no tank ball error, payout error, etc. A terminal for outputting information about the state, a terminal for outputting information about the number of prize balls to be paid out from the payout control device 311, and the like are provided.

The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and has a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which left and right side surfaces and an upper surface are closed and only a lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213 . However, in this embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to cover the upper portion and the right portion (the left portion in FIG. 5) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. It will happen.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354 . Namely, above the protective cover portion 354, a tank 355 which opens upward is provided, and the tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356 having, for example, two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently sloping toward the downstream side is connected. It is A payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and payout of the required number of game balls is appropriately performed by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

In the payout mechanism section 352, a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power supply from the outside is installed. there is The power switch board 382 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 V AC via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported by the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and that can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow in. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging the pachinko machine 10 to the outside is formed. In other words, the game balls that have won the respective prize-winning openings of the general prize-winning device 31 and the like are collected through the ball recovery mechanism of the back frame set 215 and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 . Incidentally, the out port 36 is similarly connected to the discharge passage portion 217, and the game balls that do not win in any of the prize winning ports are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is also possible to

In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, the power supply / launch control device 310, the payout control device 311, and the CR unit connection board 314 are detachably attached in a state of being stacked back and forth. It is The power/launch control device 310 includes a launch control circuit 312 and a power circuit 313 , is housed in a board box 313 a and is fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251 .

In addition, the payout control device 311 is housed in a board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the power supply and firing control device 310). The board box 311a housing the payout control device 311 is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 housing the above-described main control device 261, so that a trace of the opening of the board box 311a remains. there is

In addition, the CR unit connection board 314 is housed in a board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (power supply/launch control device 310). The board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Also, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 projecting outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball clogging occurs in the payout motor, the payout motor rotates forward or reverse to clear the ball jam (return to normal state).

Further, the power supply circuit 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 projecting outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and even in the event of a power failure, it can retain the state at the time of the power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery of power). can. Therefore, when the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. to put in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the rear side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 . The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame 14. A key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 700 and rotated to one side to open the inner frame. 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame 14 can be unlocked by rotating to the other side. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 12 .

As described above, the right-side frame-constituting portion 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). reference). As a result, it becomes difficult to insert a wire or the like from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Furthermore, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The rear pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame 14 is provided at the lower right portion of the front side of the inner frame 12 (the right side of the launcher 60). As shown, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right portion of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 each have a detection part that can appear and disappear with respect to the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection part faces forward, The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection portion faces rearward. When the detector is in a state of protruding from the switch body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detector is pushed toward the switch body and retracted into the switch body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261 . That is, when the front frame 14 is closed, the front frame open detection switch 91 is turned off when the detection portion is pressed by the back surface of the front frame 14, and when the front frame 14 is opened, the detection portion returns to the protruding state and is turned on. Become. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is turned off by pressing the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11. When the inner frame 12 is opened, the switch 92 is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. A CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic unit, is mounted on the main controller 261 as main control means. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. Also, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, and the like. ) and a backup area 503a.

The RAM 503 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply circuit 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. All data that is stored is backed up.

The backup area 503a is designed to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned off when the power is turned off due to a power cut or the like. (similarly)) and the values of each register, I/O, etc. are stored. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main processing when the power is turned off, and conversely, each value written to the backup area 503a is restored when the power is turned on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation; the same applies hereinafter). is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus, a data bus, and the like. Connected to the input/output port 505 are a RAM erasing switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub-control device 262, first and second special display devices 43a and 43b, a normal symbol display device 41, and the like, which will be described later. With this configuration, the above-described special display devices 43a and 43b and the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. FIG. On the other hand, the decorative pattern display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262 .

In addition, although illustration of various relay boards is omitted for convenience, the input/output port 505 includes a general winning switch 221, a count switch 223a, a specific ball detection switch 223b, a non-specific ball detection switch 223c, and a ball count switch. 226, start winning switches 224a, 224b, 224c, various detection switches such as through gate switch 225, various boards such as power supply / launch control device 310, payout control device 311, sub control device 262, holding display devices 46a, 46b , Information display devices such as the normal holding display device 44, solenoids for opening and closing the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, various electric parts such as a motor for opening and closing the first support start winning device 33b (wing member 37) It is connected. In other words, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic device, a ROM 552 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. It includes a RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc., an input/output port 554, a bus line 555, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit (not shown). It has The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 551 .

The input/output port 554 is connected to the CPU 551 , the ROM 552 and the RAM 553 via a bus line 555 and also to the display control device 45 . Further, the input/output port 554 is connected with the speaker SP, the effect button 125, the cross button 126, the annular illumination portion 102, the error display lamp 104, and the like.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and causes the decorative pattern display device 42 to display. As described above, in the present embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43a and 43b controlled by the main controller 261 are used to indicate that the jackpot has been won. In the decorative design display device 42 controlled by , variable display of the decorative design is performed as effect display in accordance with the variable display of the special design in the special display devices 43a and 43b.

The payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358 . A CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 storing control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 used as a work memory and the like.

Similar to the RAM 503 of the main controller 261, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply circuit 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. data is backed up. If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

Backup area 513a, when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned on again, the stack pointer at the time of power cut, each register, This is an area for storing values such as I/O. Writing to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned on. As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In the work area, a payout permission flag set to allow the payout of prize balls by the payout control device 311, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a main control device 261 A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag for setting the payout permission of prize balls, and is turned on when a specific command permitting the payout of prize balls is transmitted from the main controller 261 and the specific command is received. or when it returns to the state before power-off. In this embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command that instructs the initialization process of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a There are three payout return commands sent in the case.

The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. It is turned off when returning to the previous state, and is turned off when the received command is determined by the command determination process.

The command buffer consists of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 . The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored and read, the store pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to the RAM erase switch circuit 543, the main controller 261, the power supply/fire control device 310 (fire control circuit 312), the dispensing device 358, the CR unit connection board 314, and the like.

The CR unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (rental switch 121 and return switch 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and a CR unit (card reader unit, ball rental unit) and the payout control device 311 are electrically connected to each other. Information relating to the ball lending operation section by the player or the ball lending operation to the CR unit is input to the CR unit, and the balance of the game value is stored in the card which is a recording medium inserted in the CR unit. If so, the balance of the card is subtracted, and a payout request signal for the number of game balls corresponding to the subtraction is output to the payout control device 311 . Note that the recording medium of the CR unit is not limited to the card type, and may be of the coin type or stick type.

In addition, the payout control device 311 periodically sends a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected to the firing control circuit 312 of the power supply and firing control device 310. It is configured to output every 2 msec, for example.

A launch control circuit 312 of the power supply and launch control device 310 permits or prohibits launching of game balls by the launcher 60 . The firing control circuit 312 is electrically connected to the handle 18 , the dispensing control device 311 and the main control device 261 . In addition, the firing control circuit 312 receives a dial position signal from a variable resistor indicating the rotation amount (rotation angle) of the handle 18 (rotating operation body 18a) from the handle 18, It is configured so that a touch signal from the touch sensor indicating that the player is in the game and a launch switch signal indicating that the player is not operating the stop lever 18b can be input. Further, the firing control circuit 312 is configured to receive a CR unit connection signal from the payout control device 311, which indicates that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected.

Then, the firing control circuit 312 outputs a firing state signal to the main controller 261 on condition that the touch signal, the firing switch signal, and the CR unit connection signal are input, and the main controller 261 outputs the firing state signal to the main controller 261. A launch permission signal and a ball feed signal are output to the launch control circuit 312 on condition that the state signal is input. The main controller 261 outputs a launch permission signal at intervals of 0.6 seconds while the launch status signal is being input.

Further, the shooting control circuit 312 is configured to drive the ball sending device 63 and send the game ball to the shooting position when the ball sending signal is input. It should be noted that, in a state in which it is detected that a game ball already exists at the shooting position by the preparation ball detection sensor provided in the ball feeding device 63 and capable of detecting whether or not the game ball exists at the shooting position, the ball feeding device 63 is not driven (even if a ball sending signal is received, the game ball is not sent to the launch position).

Furthermore, the firing control circuit 312 drives the firing device 60 (firing solenoid) on condition that the touch signal, firing switch signal, CR unit connection signal, (dial position signal), and firing permission signal are input. It is configured to allow As a result, the game ball set at the shooting position is shot by the shooting device 60 with strength based on the dial position signal.

In addition, the power supply circuit 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power failure due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM deletion switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM deletion switch 323. and

The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating power to each of the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24V power supply supplied from the outside, and generates +12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, +5V power supply for logic, backup power supply for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. Operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, and the like via a control device to which these are connected.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout controller 311 when the power is shut off due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. A power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. By the output of this power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of power failure and execute power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the power failure processing. configured to maintain value. Therefore, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 according to the state of the switch 323 . When the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erasing switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erasing signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the RAMs 503 and 513 of the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 are cleared. be.

The display control device 45 follows the instruction from the sub-controller 262 and executes the variable display of the decorative design in the decorative design display device 42 . The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. and An input/output port 554 of the sub-controller 262 is connected to the input port 527 . Also, the CPU 521 , program ROM 522 , work RAM 523 and VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530 . An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and the output port 529 is connected to the decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command, and controls the VDP 526. (generate internal command for VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed.

A program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and a work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 521. is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the decorative design display device 42. By rewriting the content of the video RAM 524, the display content of the decorative design display device 42 is changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as designs displayed on the decorative design display device 42 .

The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the decorative pattern display device 42 . Since the VDP 526 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of each of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as main control means performs a lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a success/failure random number counter C1 as a success/failure random number generation means used for a success/failure lottery to determine whether or not to generate a big win state, and a type used to determine the type of big win (type lottery). A determination counter C2, a variation selection counter C3 used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win state in the decorative pattern display device 42, an initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the success or failure random number counter C1, and a first And the second special display devices 43a, 43b (decorative pattern display device 42) used for determining the variable display time, etc., the first variation type counter CS1, the second variation type counter CS2, and the first support start winning device 33b are opened. A normal symbol random number counter C4 used for a ball entry support lottery for determining whether or not to enter the state is used. The variation selection counter C3 is also used for a lottery for a ready-to-win pattern when the decorative pattern display device 42 is deviated and varied. The variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for variation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative symbol display device .

Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 stores the values of the success/failure random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 as a special variation reservation area as a reservation storage means, and the normal pattern random number counter C4. A variable holding area is provided. The normal variable holding area comprises four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas) and one execution area. In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored chronologically according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34.例文帳に追加By adopting this configuration, the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 can be held up to four times.

In addition, the special variable reservation area is a first special variable reservation area having four reservation areas (first reservation to fourth reservation area) and one execution area, and one reservation area (first reservation area). and a second special variable holding area comprising an execution area. In the reservation area of the first special variable reservation area, in accordance with the winning history of the game ball to the first normal start prize winning device 33a and the first support start prize winning device 33b, a success or failure random number counter C1, a type determination counter C2, and a variable Each value of the selection counter C3 is stored chronologically. In the reservation area of the second special variable reservation area, each value of the win/fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 is chronologically displayed according to the winning history of the game ball to the second start winning device 33c. stored By adopting this configuration, the first variable display on the first special display device 43a can be suspended up to four times, and the second variable display on the second special display device 43b can be suspended up to one time.

To explain each counter in detail, the hit/fail random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 695, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 695) as the closing price, 0, which is the lower limit value as the opening price, is reached. It is configured to return to Normally, when the success/failure random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the success/failure random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter (value = 0 to 695) similar to the success/failure random number counter C1, and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the success/failure random number counter C1 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success/failure random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first normal starting winning device 33a, the first peak and starting winning device 33b, or the second starting winning device 33c, the winning random number counter C1 stored in the winning random number counter buffer is stored in the special variable reservation area.

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning probability of the first win/fail lottery does not change according to the game mode, and the number of values of the win/fail random number counter C1 that becomes a big win is one, and the value is "7". is. For this reason, the ROM 502 has a winning value determination table storing "7" as a big winning value as a winning value storage means that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 corresponds to a big win. are provided.

The type determining counter C2 is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 19, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 19). Further, the ROM 502 is provided with a first type determination table and a second type determination table that are referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to. Then, when a jackpot is won in a lottery, the type of the jackpot state to be given is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 (a type lottery is performed), and the jackpot state of the determined type is given. The Rukoto.

The type determination counter C2 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the first or second type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first normal starting winning device 33a, the first support starting winning device 33b, or the second starting winning device 33c, the type stored in the first or second type determination counter buffer The value of the decision counter C2 is stored in the special change holding area of the RAM503.

The variable selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit (that is, 238). In this embodiment, after the ready-to-win state occurs with respect to the decorative pattern, the final stop pattern shifts by one before and after the ready-to-win pattern by the variation selection counter C3 and stops, and the same ready-to-win state occurs. After that, a lottery is drawn for "reach other than front and rear out" in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol, and "out (complete failure)" in which the reach state does not occur. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting prize winning device 33c, it wins either a big win or a small win, and does not become a "lost". Only one reach determination table for the first variable display is provided, which stores the correspondence between values and reach patterns. However, even if the game ball enters the second start-up winning device 33c, it may be "missed". Based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 acquired with the entry of the ball as a trigger, the first reach determination table referred to when determining the reach pattern (when not hitting the jackpot), and the second start winning device 33c A second reach determination table may be provided to be referred to when determining the reach pattern (when not hitting a big hit) based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 acquired with the entry of the game ball as a trigger.

The variation selection counter C3 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the variation selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first normal starting winning device 33a, the first supporting starting winning device 33b, or the second starting winning device 33c, the value of the variable selection counter C3 stored in the variable selection counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503 .

In addition, one of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 255, for example, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 255), and then the lower limit. It is configured to return to 0, and the other fluctuation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 31, and after reaching the upper limit (that is, 31), it returns to 0, which is the lower limit. It has become.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the special display devices 43a and 43b and the rough fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display on the decorative pattern display device 42 (reach patterns such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach) are associated with each other. , If the fluctuation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b is determined, the fluctuation pattern of the decorative design display device 42 is also decided (the fluctuation pattern in the decorative design display device 42 that fits exactly within the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the special display devices 43a and 43b) to select). For example, the variation time is determined based on the variation type counter CS1, and the stop display mode in the special display devices 43a and 43b is determined by the variation type counter CS2 (for example, when corresponding to the 15RS jackpot, the 15RS any one of the stop display modes corresponding to the big win may be determined). Note that the counters and the like used to determine the fluctuation time and fluctuation pattern are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately changed for each model.

In addition, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing. In this embodiment, regarding the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2, the game ball has won the first normal start winning device 33a, the first support start winning device 33b, or the second start winning device 33c (start winning ), the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the variation type counter buffer of the RAM 503 are stored in the special variation holding area of the RAM 503 at the timing.

In this way, by acquiring the value of the variation type counter CS1 at the timing of the start winning, the first variation time and the second variation time of the first variation display or the second variation display retained and stored are varied. It is possible to comprehend (read ahead) before the start, and it is possible to perform various productions using the information. In addition, when it is not necessary to read the variation time in advance and produce an effect, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation of the decorative design by the decorative design display device 42. good too.

Note that the size and range of each counter is merely an example and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

Also, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, for example, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit (that is, 29). The normal symbol random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34. In the present embodiment, the number of random number values to be won is 3, and the range is "27 to 29", regardless of whether the player is in a low-ball-entering state or a high-ball-entering state. That is, in the present embodiment, the ROM 502 has a common support determination table that is referred to in the entry support lottery for both the low entry state and the high entry state. Then, when the value of the normal design random number counter C4 to be elected is acquired, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time in the normal design display device 41, (the normal design lamps constituting the normal design display device 41 blink alternately ), it is stopped and displayed in a mode (lighting pattern) corresponding to winning, and the first support starting prize device 33b is opened in a pattern corresponding to the game mode at that time.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to flowcharts. The processing of the CPU 501 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the main processing will be explained.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 every 2 msec, for example. First, in step S301, a process of reading various winning switches is executed. That is, it reads the states of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information). On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process proceeds to the next process.

In addition, when there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding winning ball counter is added. In addition, in the external output processing of the normal processing to be described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and prize balls are provided based on the prize ball command (game balls are paid out). ). Furthermore, when this prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

Also, in step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the hit/fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are incremented by 1, respectively, and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2, C3 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503. FIG.

After that, in step S304, the start winning process accompanying the entry (winning) of the game ball to the first normal starting winning device 33a, the first support starting winning device 33b, and the second starting winning device 33c is executed, and in step S305, , through-gate passing processing accompanying passage of a game ball to the through-gate 34 is executed. In the following step S306, a firing permission command setting process for transmitting a firing permission signal to the firing control circuit 312 of the power/fire control device 310 is performed. Furthermore, in step S307, a remaining ball monitoring process for checking whether or not game balls remain in the specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b is performed. After that, the timer interrupt processing is once terminated.

Here, the starting winning process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The RAM 503 stores a first hold counter Na for counting the number of holds of the first variable display triggered by winning the first normal start prize winning device 33a and the first support start prize winning device 33b, and a second start prize winning device. A second suspension counter Nb is provided for counting the number of suspensions of the second variable display triggered by the winning of the device 33c.

In addition, in the execution area and each reservation area of the first and second special change reservation areas, the success or failure random number storage area that stores the value of the success or failure random number counter C1, the winning type random number storage area that stores the value of the type determination counter C2, A reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3 and first and second variation type random number storage areas for storing the values of the first and second variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are provided.

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second start prize winning device 33c based on the detection information of the second start prize winning switch 224c. If the determination in step S501 is affirmative, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the second suspension counter Nb is less than the upper limit value ("1" in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S510. On the other hand, if the determination in step S502 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S503, and the second suspension counter Nb is incremented by one.

In the following step S504, addition display processing of the second suspension display device 46b (second suspension lamp) corresponding to the increase of one in the number of suspensions of the second variable display is performed. In other words, if the second reservation lamp is in the off state, processing is performed to turn it on.

After step S504, in step S505, each value of the hit/fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 (the hit/fail random number counter buffer, the type determination counter buffer, the variation selection counter buffer , and each value stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer) is stored in the first reservation area among the vacant reservation areas of the second special change reservation area (in this example, the hit/fail random number storage area of the first reservation area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area, and first and second variation type random number storage areas). After step S505, the process proceeds to step S506.

In step S506, the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the second special change reservation area is a value corresponding to a big hit or a small hit. In addition, the details of the success/failure determination process will be described later.

In the following step S507, when it is determined in step S506 that the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to a big hit, based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the second special change reservation area , performs a second type determination process for determining the type of jackpot. Details of the second type determination process will be described later.

Here, the details of the success/failure determination process in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S5101, it is determined whether the value (0 to 239) of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reservation area matches the value "7" stored in the hit/fail determination table. determine. When an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, in step S5102, after turning on the jackpot schedule flag of the corresponding reservation area among the special change reservation areas, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5101, it is determined in step S5103 whether or not the change information newly stored in the special change reservation area corresponds to the second change display. If a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if the process corresponds to the pending storage of the first variable display, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S5103 is affirmative, in step S5104, after turning on the small hit schedule flag of the corresponding reservation area among the special variation reservation areas, this process ends.

Next, the second type determination processing in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. 15(b).

First, in step S5301, referring to the second type determination table, the value (0 to 19) of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the second special change reservation area is the value "0 to 19" corresponding to "15RS". 5” is determined. When an affirmative determination is made in step S5301, in step S5302, after turning on the 15RS flag of the corresponding reservation area among the second special change reservation areas, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S5301 is negative, it is determined in step S5303 whether or not the value of the type determination counter C2 is "6 to 12" corresponding to "8RS". When an affirmative determination is made in step S5303, in step S5304, after turning on the 8RS flag of the corresponding reservation area among the second special change reservation areas, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5303, that is, if the value of the type determination counter C2 is "13 to 19", in step S5305, the 8RN flag of the corresponding reservation area out of the second special change reservation area is turned on, and then this process ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, regarding the jackpot type that occurs based on the ball entering the specific ball entering section 145 of the second variable prize winning device 32b, the second type determination is performed along with the winning of the small jackpot. configured to be determined by processing. In addition, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting prize winning device 33c, either a big win or a small win is always won, so in the second type determination process, the big win type is always to be determined. In addition, when adopting a configuration in which there is a possibility that a game ball enters the second start winning device 33c and may be lost, whether the big hit schedule flag or the small hit schedule flag is set to ON After determining whether or not, the second type determination process is performed only when the determination is affirmative.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S508 following step S507, a variation time determination process for determining the second variation time of the second variation display is performed. That is, in the rush mode, the second short variation time determination table shown in FIG. 48 is referenced, and the variation time is grasped based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. On the other hand, when in the normal mode or the time saving mode, referring to the "normal" of the second long fluctuation time determination table shown in FIG. 48, the fluctuation time is grasped based on the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 . Furthermore, the grasped fluctuation time is stored in the corresponding reservation area of the second special fluctuation reservation area (the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 in the same reservation area is not erased).

In addition, in this embodiment, a mode storage area is provided for reference when determining the game mode. Any value of "11", "12", and "21" is stored in the mode storage area, "11" corresponds to the normal mode, "12" corresponds to the time saving mode, and "21" ” supports rush mode.

In step S509 following step S508, setting processing of the preceding command is performed. In addition, the starting command includes variation information (information used to determine the contents of the variable display) indicating the results of the success/failure determination process, the type determination process, and the variable time determination process, and the first normal start winning device. 33a or the second starting prize winning device 33c, which indicates whether the variation information is triggered by entering the ball, and is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201). .

After the processing of step S509, or when a negative determination is made in step S501 or step S502, in step S510, the game ball is sent to the first normal start winning device 33 and the first support start winning device 33b. Whether or not a prize has been won is determined based on the detection information of the first normal start prize switch 224a and the first support start prize detection switch 224b. If a negative determination is made in step S510, this process ends. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, in step S511, the value of the first suspension counter Na that counts the number of suspensions of the variable display triggered by the winning of the first normal start prize winning device 33a is the upper limit value (this embodiment Then, it is determined whether or not it is less than "4"). If a negative determination is made in step S511, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S511, the process proceeds to step S512, and the first suspension counter Na is incremented by one.

In the following step S513, addition display processing of the first suspension display device 46a (first suspension lamp) corresponding to the number of suspensions of the first variable display being increased by one is performed. That is, when both the left and right first reservation lamps are in the off state, the left first reservation lamp is turned on, the left first reservation lamp is in the on state, and the right first reservation lamp is in the off state. If it is, both the left and right first reservation lamps are lit, and if both the left and right first reservation lamps are in the lighting state, the left first reservation lamp is lit while the right first reservation lamp is lit. is blinked, and when the first reservation lamp on the left side is in a blinking state and the first reservation lamp on the right side is in a lighting state, processing for blinking both the first reservation lamps on the left and right is performed.

After step S513, in step S514, each value of the hit/fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 is set to the empty reservation area of the first special variation reservation area ( win/fail random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area, and first and second variation type random number storage areas). After step S514, the process proceeds to step S515.

In step S515, a win/fail determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the first special change reservation area is a value corresponding to a big win. The details of the suitability determination process have already been described above.

In the following step S516, when it is determined in step S515 that the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the big hit, based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special change reservation area , performs a first type determination process for determining the jackpot type.

Here, the first type determination processing in step S516 will be described with reference to FIG. 15(a). First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the big hit schedule flag is set to ON in the success/failure determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step S5201, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S5201 is affirmative, in step S5202, the first type determination table is taken into consideration, and the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the first special change reservation area is set to "8RS". Determine if it matches the corresponding value "0-5". If the determination in step S5202 is affirmative, the 8RS flag is turned on in step S5203, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5202, the 8RN flag is turned on in step S5204, and this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S517 following step S516, when it is determined that the value of the success or failure random number counter C1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot in step S515 (is out), a new first special variation Based on the value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the reservation area, reach determination processing for determining the type of reach is performed.

Here, the reach determination processing in step S517 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the big hit schedule flag is set in the success/failure determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5401, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5401, that is, if it is out, in step S5402, the reach determination table is taken into consideration, and the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation reservation area is " It is determined whether or not it matches with either of the values "0, 1" corresponding to the front-rear out-of-reach reach. If the determination in step S5402 is affirmative, in step S5403, the front-rear flag indicating the occurrence of the front-rear out-of-reach reach is turned on, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5402, the reach determination table is taken into account in step S5404, and the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation reservation area corresponds to "reach other than front and rear deviation". It determines whether or not it matches any of the values "2 to 21". If the determination in step S5404 is affirmative, the flag other than before and after is turned on in step S5405, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S5404, that is, if the variable display ends without going through the reach state, that is, "completely out", this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S518 following step S517, a variation time determination process for determining the first variation time of the first variation display is performed. That is, in the normal mode where "11" is stored in the mode storage area, the first middle fluctuation time determination table shown in FIGS. Based on this, the first fluctuation time is grasped. If it is in the time saving mode where "12" is stored in the mode storage area, refer to the first short fluctuation time determination table shown in FIGS. , to grasp the first variation time. 47(k) and (l), the first long fluctuation time determination table shown in FIGS. to grasp the first variation time. Furthermore, the grasped fluctuation time is stored in the corresponding reservation area of the first special fluctuation reservation area (the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 in the same reservation area is not erased).

After step S518, in step S519, a preceding command setting process is performed, and this process ends. In addition, the starting command includes variation information indicating the results of win/fail determination processing, type determination processing, reach determination processing, and variation time determination processing, and to which of the first normal start winning device 33a or the second start winning device 33c It contains information indicating whether it is variation information triggered by the entry of a ball, and is output to the sub-controller 262 in the next external output process (see step S201).

In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first normal starting prize winning device 33a or the second starting prize winning device 33c, the value of the success/failure random number counter C1, etc., is directly stored in the special variable holding area, and then the success/failure determination is performed. Although it is configured to execute processing and the like, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, when the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is acquired, a temporary storage area is provided to temporarily store these counter values. You may adopt the structure which stores in the reservation area of the corresponding special variable reservation area.

The process of extracting the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S514 constitutes the discrimination value extraction process, and the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 extracted in steps S505 and S514 is stored in the special change holding area. The process constitutes the discriminant value storage process. Further, the function of extracting and storing the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 constitutes the information acquisition means. Further, the process of determining whether or not the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 in steps S506 and S515 (steps S5101 and S5103) is a value corresponding to winning constitutes the first success/failure determination process, and the determination result is The processing of steps S5102 and S5104 for storing (setting the corresponding flag) constitutes result storage processing.

Next, the through gate passage processing in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225. FIG. If a negative determination is made in step S601, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, then in step S602, the number of suspensions of variable display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is counted. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, if it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, and the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step S603, and the normal reservation counter is reached. Increment Nc by one.

Further, in the subsequent step S604, addition display processing of the normal reservation display device 44 (normal reservation lamp) corresponding to the increase of one in the number of suspensions of variable display in the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. In other words, if both the left and right normal holding lamps are off, the left normal holding lamp is turned on, and if the left normal holding lamp is on and the right normal holding lamp is off. When both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the left normal hold lamp is blinked while the right normal hold lamp is lit, and the left normal hold lamp is lit. When the lamp is in a flashing state and the right normal holding lamp is in a lighting state, a process for flashing both the left and right normal holding lamps is performed.

After step S604, in step S605, a random number relating to success or failure is obtained. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated in the random number update process of step S303 is stored in the first area of the free storage areas of the normal fluctuation reservation area of the RAM503. After that, the through gate passage processing ends.

Next, the firing permission command setting process in step S306 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the firing permission flag indicating that the firing state signal is being received from the firing control circuit 312 is set to ON. The firing state signal is the firing control circuit 312 when the firing control circuit 312 receives the touch signal from the handle 18, the firing switch signal, and the CR unit connection signal from the dispensing control device 311. to the main controller 261.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S702 whether or not a firing state signal has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S702, the firing permission flag is turned off in step S703, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined in step S704 whether or not the value of the shooting timer used to measure the game ball shooting interval is "0". If the determination in step S704 is negative, the value of the firing timer is decremented by 1 in step S707, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S704 is affirmative, the main controller 261 transmits a firing permission signal to the firing control circuit 312 in step S705. In the subsequent step S706, the launch permission flag is turned off. After step S706, the process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S701, it is determined in step S708 whether or not a firing state signal has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S708, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination in step S708 is affirmative, in step S709 the firing permission flag is set to ON.

In the subsequent step S710, a ball feed signal is transmitted to the launch control circuit 312. FIG. Further, in step S711, the firing timer is set to "300" corresponding to 0.6 seconds. As a result, after the game ball is surely set at the shooting position by the ball feeding device 63, the game ball is shot by the shooting device 60, and the main controller 261 is sent from the shooting control circuit 312 to the shooting state. While the signal is being received, the main controller 261 transmits a launch permission signal at intervals of 0.6 seconds, and game balls are launched from the launcher 60 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. After step S711, the process ends.

In addition, when the firing control circuit 312 receives a firing permission signal from the main controller 261, it receives all of the touch signal, the firing switch signal, and the CR unit connection signal from the handle 18 and the dispensing control device 311. It is determined whether or not the game ball is being played, and if the determination is affirmative, the shooting device 60 (shooting solenoid) is driven and shooting processing for shooting the game ball is performed. In addition, the shooting control circuit 312 performs adjustment control of the shooting device 60 regarding the shooting strength (shooting speed) of the game ball based on the dial position signal. As a result, the game ball is launched by the shooting device 60 with the adjusted strength.

Further, when the shooting control circuit 312 receives a ball feed signal from the main controller 261, the game ball is set at the shooting position where the game ball is shot by the shooting device 60 of the shooting rail 61. When it is confirmed that the game ball is not set at the shooting position, the ball feeding device 63 is driven to set the game ball at the shooting position. Carry out ball feed processing.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power failure is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. FIG.

That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. FIG. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing. finish.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 311 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by such NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. to start the NMI interrupt processing in FIG. The contents are as described above.

Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is activated upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable, for example, 1 Execute wait processing for about a second. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

After that, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501 . That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply circuit 313 of the power/launch control device 310 is pressed (ON). Therefore, the process proceeds to step S112. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the following step S104 whether or not the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if it is not set, backup data is not stored, so in this case also, the process proceeds to step S112. If the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power was turned off, the backed-up data is destroyed, and in this case also, the process proceeds to step S112.

In the processing of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262, the payout control device 311, and the like. Thereafter, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S113, etc.). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 503 . Instead of using this RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113, etc.). Also, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S113, etc.) is similarly performed. That is, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0 in step S113, and the initial value of the RAM 503 is set in the subsequent step S114. After that, in step S111, interrupt permission is set, and the normal processing described later is performed.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), the condition is that power failure occurrence information is set and that the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the power recovery process (power recovery process) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, and in step S108, power-off occurrence information is cleared.

In step S109, a command is transmitted to return the sub-side control device to the gaming state at the time of power-off. In step S110, the used register is recovered from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. FIG. After that, in step S111, interrupt permission is set, and the normal processing described later is performed.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Main processing of the game is executed in this normal processing. As an overview, the processing of steps S201 to S211 is executed as periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S212 and S213 is executed during the remaining time.

First, in step S201, a control signal based on the settings of the special display devices 43a, 43b and the starting prize winning devices 33a, 33b, 33c updated in the previous normal processing is transmitted to each device, or output data such as a command is transmitted. to each control device on the sub side.

For example, when starting variable display on the special display devices 43a and 43b, a variable pattern command is transmitted to the sub-controller 262 in order to start variable display of the decorative design on the decorative design display device 42 or the like. The sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command determines the display mode (variation time, production pattern, etc.) of the decorative design display device 42 based on such various commands, and displays the display mode on the decorative design display device 42. An instruction is issued to the display control device 45 so as to do so.

The variation pattern command includes information specifying variation patterns of decorative symbols such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. On the other hand, the sub-controller 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation patterns of the decorative symbols in the form of a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 determines the variation pattern of the decorative pattern and the like based on the variation pattern command, and controls the display control device 45, voice, and the like.

Here, the variation pattern of the decorative design will be described. "Normal reach" is a reach pattern in which no special effects are displayed other than the variable display of decorative patterns. "Super ready-to-win" means that a character or the like is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 in addition to the decorative patterns during the variable display of the decorative patterns (after establishment of the ready-to-win state), thereby giving the player a sense of anticipation. It's a pattern. "Premium reach" is a production mode that can be derived only when the jackpot state occurs, and during the variable display of the decorative pattern (after the reach state is established), in addition to the decorative pattern, a character with a pattern different from the super reach is displayed, and this is a reach pattern that gives the player a sense of expectation. In addition, "Completely out" is a variation pattern in which the variation display of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed without reaching any of the ready-to-win states.

In addition, the sub-control device 262 determines the stop pattern (combination of stop patterns) of the variable display of the decorative design in the decorative design display device 42 based on the information of the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time included in the fluctuation pattern command. to stop display after the fluctuation time has elapsed. In other words, when winning a jackpot with a rush (“15RS” and “8RS”), the variable display is stopped by a combination of decorative patterns (a combination of jackpot patterns) consisting of one of 1 to 9. be done. If you win the time-saving jackpot ("8RN"), the combination of decorative patterns (combination of time-saving jackpot patterns) consisting of an even number of 2, 4, 6, or 8 will be displayed. Stop is displayed. That is, only when the jackpot with rush is won, the variable display is stopped by a combination of decorative patterns (combination of jackpot patterns with rush) consisting of odd numbers of 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9. can be displayed.

The combination of front-rear out-of-order symbols corresponds to "front-rear out-of-rear reach" in which the final stop symbol is shifted forward and backward from the ready-to-win symbol by one and stops after the occurrence of ready-to-win. The combination of symbols other than front-rear deviation corresponds to "reach other than front-rear deviation" in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the ready-to-win pattern after the occurrence of the ready-to-win. A combination of completely missing symbols corresponds to "completely missing" in which even reach does not occur. In addition, in the main control device 261, a combination of jackpot patterns, a combination of jackpot patterns with rush, a combination of jackpot patterns with time saving, a combination of front and back off patterns, a combination of patterns other than front and back off, and a complete off pattern. A pattern command designating one of the combinations may be set and output to the sub-control device 262 together with the variation pattern command.

Returning to the description of FIG. 10, in step S202, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach the upper limit values (255 and 31 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. do. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503 .

In the subsequent step S203, the prize ball count signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

After that, in step S205, a second special display control process is executed. In this process, the control relating to the second special display device 43b is performed, and determination of a big hit or a small hit, setting of variable display in the second special display device 43b and the decorative pattern display device 42, etc. are performed. The details of this second special display control process will be described later.

Furthermore, in step S206, a first special display control process is executed. In this process, control related to the first special display device 43a is performed, determination of a big hit, setting of variable display in the first special display device 43a and the decorative pattern display device 42, and the like are performed. Details of the first special display control process will be described later.

In step S207, a variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b is performed. Further, details of the variable winning device control processing will be described later.

In step S208, normal display control processing is executed. In this process, control relating to the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. The details of this normal display control process will be described later.

In step S209, a starting winning device control process is executed. In this process, the control of the first support start winning device 33b having the blade member 37 is performed. The details of this startup winning device control process will be described later.

After that, in step S210, it is determined whether information on the occurrence of power failure is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if power failure occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step S211, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has come, that is, a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. ) has passed. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. It is repeatedly executed (steps S212 and S213).

That is, in step S212, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (695 in this example).

Also, in step S213, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (255 and 31 in this example). Then, the changed values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503 .

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S210 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the success/failure random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly fluctuates. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be randomly updated.

Also, if the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S210: YES), it means that the power has been shut down, so the processes from step S214 onward are performed as power failure processing at the time of power failure. will be In the power failure process, first, in step S214, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step S215, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area. memorize to

After that, in step S217, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (payout control device 311, etc.). Then, in step S218, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 503 . Thereafter, in step S219, RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

It should be noted that the process of step S210 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed at steps S201 to S209, or at the end of one cycle of the processes at steps S212 and S213 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at different times. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, since information on occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in progress. and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the main controller 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before data is stored (step S214), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, and the state before the power cut-off can be reliably stored. .

Next, the first special display control processing in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the value of the first variable interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the variable interval set after the first variable display of the first special display device 43a is "0". do. If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if it is within the period of the fluctuation interval, in step S819, the value of the first fluctuation interval timer is subtracted, and then this processing is terminated. That is, for example, if the variable interval is set to 1 second (1000 msec) and the first variable interval timer is set to "249 ("250" in the case of the configuration in which step S819 is performed before step S801)". In this process, the value of the first variable interval timer is decremented by "1" every 4 msec, and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S801 is affirmative, that is, if it is not a variable interval, in step S802, the hit situation storage area, which will be described later in detail, is referred to, and the current state other than the big win state and the small win state determine whether there is

In addition, during the jackpot state, the display mode corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the first special display device 43a or the second special display device 43b until the first variable winning device 32a is opened. An opening period, a round period in which the first variable prize winning device 32a is open, an interval period in which the first variable prize winning device 32a is closed, and after the final round, the first special display device 43a, and There is an ending period until the variable display of the second special display device 43b can be started.

The small winning state includes a round period during which the second variable winning device 32b is open and an interval period during which the second variable winning device 32b is closed.

In the winning state storage area of the present embodiment, "0" is stored in states other than the big win state and the small win state, and in the big win state, "1" is stored during the opening period and the interval period, and "1" is stored during the round period. "2" is stored when it is the ending period, and "3" is stored when it is the ending period. In the small win state, "4" is stored in the first round, "5" is stored in the interval period after the first round, and "6" is stored in the second round. That is, in the step S802, it is determined whether or not "0" is stored in the hit state storage area, and it is determined whether or not the game is in a big win state or a small win state.

If a negative determination is made in step S802, that is, if the game is in the big hit state or the small hit state, the process ends.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S802, in step S803, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot determination flag indicating that the second variation display corresponding to the jackpot is being performed is set to ON. . If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, this process is terminated. That is, when the second special display device 43b is performing the second variable display for teaching a big win, the first special display device 43a is configured not to newly start the first variable display. there is

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S803, in step S804, it is determined whether the special figure 1 displaying flag indicating that the first variable display is being performed in the first special display device 43a is set on. discriminate. If a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, if it is not in the big win state or the small win state and it is not in the first fluctuation display, the process proceeds to step S805, the first normal start winning device 33a and the first support It is determined whether or not the first suspension counter Na for counting the number of suspensions of the first variable display triggered by the entry of the ball into the starting prize winning device 33b is greater than zero.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S805, 1 is subtracted from the first suspension counter Na in step S806. In subsequent step S807, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special change reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reservation areas of the first special variable reservation area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

After step S807, in step S808, subtraction display processing of the first suspension display device 46a (first suspension lamp) corresponding to the number of suspensions of the first variable display being decreased by one is performed. That is, when both the left and right first reservation lamps are in a blinking state, the right first reservation lamp is turned on while the left first reservation lamp is kept blinking, and the left first reservation lamp is in a blinking state. When the right first reservation lamp is lit, both the left and right first reservation lamps are lit, and when both the left and right first reservation lamps are lit, the left first reservation lamp is lit. The first reservation lamp on the right side is turned off while the is lit, and when the first reservation lamp on the left side is on and the first reservation lamp on the right side is off, both the first reservation lamps on the left and right are turned off. process to make it work. After step S808, the first variable display setting process is performed in step S809, and then this process ends.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S805, in step S810, the setting status of the special figure 2 displaying flag, which will be described in detail later, is checked, and whether the second variable display is being performed on the second special display device 43b determine whether

If the determination in step S810 is affirmative, that is, if the second variable display is in progress, the process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S810, it corresponds to a variable standby state in which variable display is not performed in both the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b in step S811. Standby display setting for deriving the display mode (for example, the first and second first special lamps from the right in the lower row, or the mode in which only the second special lamp lights up) (output to the sub-controller 262 setting of the standby display command, etc.). In other words, the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b of the present embodiment maintain the stop mode (in a mode indicating the result of the lottery) during the variation interval after the fluctuation is stopped. However, when the variable interval ends, the display mode is switched to indicate the variable standby state. After step S811, the process ends.

In addition, there are a first standby display mode and a second standby display mode in the display mode indicating that the decorative pattern display device 42 is in a variable standby state. a first standby display mode in which the stop display mode of the variable display of the decorative patterns is maintained almost as it is while the brightness of the decorative pattern display device 42 is maintained; A value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds) may be set to a standby time measurement timer that measures time. Furthermore, when the value of the standby time measurement timer is subtracted every predetermined time and becomes "0", the brightness of the decorative design display device 42 is darkened, and the display mode is also simplified (for example, the decorative design is (not displayed, etc.) may be configured to be the second standby display mode.

Here, details of the first variable display setting process in step S809 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the first special change reservation area is "7" corresponding to a big hit. In addition, in step S901, by determining whether or not the big hit schedule flag in the execution area of the first special variation reservation area is set to ON, it is possible to determine whether or not it is the first variation display corresponding to the big win. may be

When it is determined affirmatively in step S901, in step S902, the special figure 1 jackpot determination flag indicating that the first variation display corresponding to the jackpot is being performed is set to ON. In the subsequent step S903, it is determined whether or not the 8RS flag is set to ON in the execution area of the first special change reservation area. If the determination in step S903 is affirmative, 8RS pattern setting processing is performed in step S904. In step S903 etc., instead of determining the variation pattern based on the flag information such as the 8RS flag, again, based on the values of the type determination counter C2 and the variation selection counter C3, the corresponding table is referred to, You may comprise so that a fluctuation pattern may be determined.

The pattern setting process is a process for executing variable display corresponding to the variable information stored in the execution area in the special display devices 43a, 43b and the decorative pattern display device 42. The special display devices 43a, 43b, Then, the variation pattern (variation display time, stop mode, production pattern, etc.) of the decorative pattern display device 42 is determined, and the variation pattern command is set.

More specifically, in step S904, first, the game mode is grasped by confirming the mode storage area. When "11" corresponding to the normal mode is stored in the mode storage area, the first middle variation time determination table for the jackpot with rush (Fig. 47(a)) is used as the first variation time determination table to be referred to. )) is selected and "12" corresponding to the time saving mode is stored, the first short fluctuation time determination table for the jackpot with rush (see FIG. 47(f)) is selected.

Also, when "21" corresponding to the rush mode is stored in the mode storage area, the first long variation time determination table for big win (see FIG. 47(l)) is selected. In other words, in the rush mode, basically, the first variable display is set as a long variable display of 2 hours or more, but as an exception, in the case of a big hit, the first variable display is a short fluctuation of 20 seconds at the longest. It is set as a display (middle fluctuation display is also possible).

Then, referring to the selected first variation time determination table, the first variation time is determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the first special variation reservation area. The determined first variable time is stored (associated with) in the execution area of the first special variable reservation area.

Further, a reach pattern is determined based on the first fluctuation time and the fluctuation pattern. For example, referring to the first middle fluctuation time determination table for the jackpot with rush, normal reach is set when the first fluctuation time is determined to be 22 seconds, and when it is determined to be 30 seconds or 35 seconds , super reach is set, and if 40 seconds is determined, premium reach is set.

Then, information including the first variation display, the 8RS, the determined reach pattern, and the variation time is set in the variation pattern command. Furthermore, when the first long fluctuation time determination table for big win is referred to, a first forced display command is set to indicate that it is a rush mode but a special first fluctuation display in which the first fluctuation time is set to be short. do.

In this embodiment, the reach pattern of the decorative pattern display device 42 is determined by the main controller 261, but in order to reduce the burden on the main controller 261, the main controller 261 does not determine the reach pattern. , The variation pattern command includes information on whether it is the first variation display or the second variation display, and information indicating the variation pattern (15RS, 8RS, 8RN, small hit, front and rear out reach, front and rear out reach, complete It may be configured to include information that can be used to determine which is out of line) and information indicating the fluctuation time.

After step S904, in step S911, the special figure 1 displaying flag indicating that the first variable display is being performed in the first special display device 43a is set to ON, and in step S912, the remaining time of the first variable display is measured. For the special figure 1 display timer, after setting the value corresponding to the first variable time, this process is terminated.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S903, 8RN pattern setting processing is performed in step S905. For example, when "11" corresponding to the normal mode is stored in the mode storage area, the first middle fluctuation time determination table for the jackpot with time saving (see FIG. 47(b)) is selected, and the time saving mode When "12" corresponding to is stored, the first short variation time determination table for jackpot with time saving (see FIG. 47(g)) is selected, and "21" corresponding to rush mode is stored. If so, the first long variation time determination table for big wins (see FIG. 47(l)) is selected.

After step S905, in step S911, the special figure 1 displaying flag is set to ON, and in step S912, the value corresponding to the first fluctuation time is set for the special figure 1 display timer, and this process ends .

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S901, in step S906, the execution area of the first special change reservation area is considered, and it is determined whether or not the front and back flag (see reach determination processing in FIG. 16) is on. do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S906, that is, if it is "front-back reach", front-back reach pattern setting processing is performed in step S907, and this processing is terminated via steps S911 and S912. In addition, in the front-rear reach pattern setting process, in the case of the normal mode, the first middle fluctuation time determination table for the front-rear out reach (see FIG. 47 (c)) is selected, and in the case of the time saving mode, the front-rear out reach For rush mode, the first short fluctuation time determination table (see FIG. 47(h)) is selected, and in the rush mode, the first long fluctuation time determination table for normal (see FIG. 47(k)) is selected. .

Also, if the determination in step S906 is negative, in step S908, the execution area of the first special change reservation area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the flag other than before and after is on. If the determination in step S908 is affirmative, that is, in the case of "reach other than front and back out", reach pattern setting processing other than front and back is performed in step S909, and this processing is terminated via steps S911 and S912. do. In addition, in the reach pattern setting process other than before and after, in the case of normal mode, the first middle fluctuation time determination table for outside reach other than before and after (see FIG. 47(d)) is selected, and in the case of time saving mode, before and after The first short fluctuation time determination table for outside reach (see FIG. 47 (i)) is selected, and in the case of rush mode, the first long fluctuation time determination table for normal (see FIG. 47 (k)) is selected. selected.

In addition, if the determination in step S908 is negative, that is, if it is "completely out", the outlier variation pattern setting process is performed in step S910, and then the process ends through steps S911 and S912. . It should be noted that, in the off fluctuation pattern setting process, in the case of the normal mode, the first middle fluctuation time determination table for the off (see FIG. 47 (e)) is selected, and in the case of the time saving mode, the first The short fluctuation time determination table (see FIG. 47(j)) is selected, and in the rush mode, the first long fluctuation time determination table for normal use (see FIG. 47(k)) is selected.

In this embodiment, a lottery (first lottery) to determine whether or not a big win will be made is performed based on the ball entering the first normal start-up prize device 33a and the first support start-up prize device 33b. A lottery (second lottery) to determine whether or not a prize will be won is not performed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 19, when the affirmative determination is made in step S804, that is, when the first variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S812, and the special figure 1 display timer is subtracted. Every time this process is performed once, the value of the special figure 1 display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, if the variation time is 6 seconds (6000msec), "1500" is set for the special figure 1 display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S813, and it is determined whether or not the predetermined fluctuation time has passed by taking into consideration the value of the special figure 1 display timer after the above subtraction. At this time, step S813 is affirmatively determined when the value of the special figure 1 display timer becomes "0" when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed.

When a negative determination is made in step S813, in step S818, switching display setting is performed to continue the switching display (variable display) of the first special display device 43a. Based on the contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the first special display device 43a in the next external output process in the normal process. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the first special display device 43a is realized at the timing of the first special display control process, that is, every 4 ms. After step S818, the process ends.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S813, the special figure 1 display flag is turned off in step S814, and the special figure 1 stop display setting for performing the stop display in the first special display device 43a in step S815 conduct. Based on the setting contents of this special figure 1 stop display setting, in the external output process in the next normal process, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the first special display device 43a. That is, in the first special display device 43a, the mode corresponding to each jackpot type, loss, etc. set in the first variable display setting process is stopped and displayed.

Moreover, after step S815, in step S816, the sub-control device 262 is set with a special figure 1 stop command that causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to stop and display. As a result, the stop timings of the first special display device 43a and the decorative design display device 42 are reliably synchronized. However, since the stop mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-controller 262 according to the variation pattern command output at the start of the variable display, the information on the stop mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 is added again. No need. In addition, although it will be repeated, the main display is the stop display by the special display devices 43a and 43b, and the display of the decorative design by the decorative design display device 42 is only an auxiliary one (for production).

It should be noted that, in response to a big hit with a rush, the sub-controller 262 determines whether to display an odd or even number of variable display through a reach state other than a premium reach state. Therefore, when an even number of doubles is selected, it is possible to perform a promotion of the appearance of the jackpot type in the jackpot state (teach that "15RS" has been won in the jackpot state immediately after). However, although there is no instruction during the jackpot state, it may be configured to shift to the rush stage after the jackpot state ends, and even if the jackpot ends, it is possible to tell which of the rush mode and the time-saving mode has been given. It may be configured to transition to the pullback stage so as to be incomprehensible.

Subsequently, in step S817, after performing the special figure 1 discrimination information setting process for performing the initial setting of the state and the switching setting of the game mode, this process is terminated.

Here, the special figure 1 discrimination information setting process of step S817 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1001, with reference to the execution area of the first special variation reservation area, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot determination flag is set to ON. If the determination in step S1001 is affirmative, the special figure 1 jackpot determination flag is turned off in step S1002, and the jackpot medium flag (stored in the first special variation holding area) indicating that the jackpot state is in progress in step S1003 Turn on the special figure 1 jackpot medium flag) that indicates that the jackpot has been hit in the first variation display. Further, in step S1004, "8" is set to a round number counter for determining the number of rounds (the number of times the first variable winning device 32a is opened) to be executed during the jackpot state.

In the subsequent step S1005, "1" is set in the win situation storage area. Furthermore, in step S1006, a value "2000" corresponding to an opening period of 8 seconds, for example, is set for the special variable timer used for control during the winning state (opening/closing control of the first variable winning device 32a). Subsequently, in step S1007, "8" indicating the maximum number of winning balls per round of 8 is set to the winning counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 32a. set. The value of the prize winning counter is determined by determining whether or not a ball has entered the first variable prize winning device 32a based on the detection information of the count switch 223a during the switch read processing (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt processing. When it is determined that a ball has entered the winning device 32a, 1 is subtracted.

Then, in step S1008, an opening command is set to notify the sub-controller 262 of the start of the winning state. The opening command includes winning type information and the like, so that even the sub-control device 262 can grasp the total number of rounds in the winning state.

After step S1008, in step S1009, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 displaying flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S1009, the processing ends. On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made in step S1009, in step S1010, turn off the special figure 2 displaying flag, and in step S1011, the second variable display of the second special display device 43b is forcibly "off" A process for stopping display (forced termination) in a corresponding manner is performed. In other words, when the first variable display is stopped in a mode of teaching a big win, by forcibly ending (erasing) the changing second variable display regardless of the contents, after the big win state ends, The second variable display is also configured to start a new variable display.

Furthermore, in order to tell the sub-control device 262 side also to stop and display the second variable display, in step S1012, after setting the special figure 2 forced stop command, this process is terminated. In addition, in the present embodiment, in the normal mode and the time saving mode, basically, only the variable display of the decorative design corresponding to the first variable display (first effect variable display) is displayed in the decorative design display device 42. Therefore, it is also possible to omit the setting of the special figure 2 forced stop command.

If the determination in step S1001 is negative, in step S1013, a value corresponding to the variation interval (for example, 1 second) is set for the first variation interval timer. In addition, in the decorative design display device 42, basically, the variable display of the decorative design is stopped and displayed at the timing of the stop display of the variable display of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and until the fluctuation interval ends (the next special display device 43a , 43b), the stopped decoration pattern continues to be displayed. Then, when the variable interval is over and the variable display is reserved and stored, the variable display on the special display devices 43a and 43b and the variable display on the decorative pattern display device 42 are started at the same time. On the other hand, when the variable display is not retained and stored even after the variable interval is over, the stop symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 continues to be derived for a while, and then switched to the game standby display (demonstration screen display). . Also, in the variable display of the decorative design display device 42, when the decorative designs are stopped and displayed in a combination of an even number of doubles, the combination of decorative designs may be converted to an odd number of doubles during the variation interval period. A re-lottery effect may be performed (it may be a configuration that is always converted when derived).

After step S1013, in step S1014, whether or not "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether the game mode is one of the time saving mode and the rush mode determine. If a negative determination is made in step S1014, the processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1014 is affirmative, in step S1015, the value of the variation counter is subtracted by 1 to measure the duration of the time-saving mode and the rush mode (the number of variations remaining until reaching the upper limit). do. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the time saving mode and the rush mode have an upper limit of 70 times of the first variable display and the second variable display, and all types of jackpot states Since either the time-saving mode or the rush mode is provided after the end of the game, "70" is set to the variation counter at the end of the big win.

In the subsequent step S1016, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1016, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1016 is affirmative, in step S1017, "11" is set in the mode storage area to indicate the normal mode. That is, in the first special display device 43a and the second variable display 43b, when the first variable display and the second variable display are performed a total of 70 times, the time saving mode or the rush mode ends, It will switch to normal mode. After step S1017, in step S1018, after setting a support end command for notifying the sub-controller 262 of the transition to the normal mode (end of the high-entering ball mode), this process ends.

Next, the second special display control process (step S205) of the normal process (see FIG. 10) will be described with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, the second special display device 43b is configured so that the variation interval of the second variation display is not set.

First, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the value of the win situation storage area is "0", that is, whether or not the state is other than the big win state and the small win state. If a negative determination is made in step S1601, that is, if the game is in the big hit state or the small hit state, the process ends.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1601, in step S1602, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot determination flag indicating that the first variation display corresponding to the jackpot is being performed is set to ON. . If an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, the processing ends. That is, when the first variable display for teaching a big win is being performed on the first special display device 43b, the second variable display cannot be newly started on the second special display device 43b. there is

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1602, in step S1603, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 displaying flag indicating that the second variable display is being performed in the second special display device 43b is set on. discriminate. If a negative determination is made in step S1603, that is, if it is not in the big hit state or the small hit state and it is not in the second fluctuation display, the process proceeds to step S1604, and is triggered by the ball entering the second start prize winning device 33c. It is determined whether or not a second suspension counter Nb that counts the number of suspensions of the second variable display to be displayed is greater than zero.

If a negative determination is made in step S1604, this processing ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1604, 1 is subtracted from the second suspension counter Nb in step S1605. In subsequent step S1606, a process of shifting the data stored in the second special change reservation area is executed. In this data shift process, the data stored in the reserved first area of the second special variable reserved area is shifted to the execution area.

After step S1606, in step S1607, subtraction display processing of the second holding display device 46b (second holding lamp) corresponding to the fact that the holding number of the second variable display has decreased by one is performed. In other words, a process for extinguishing the second reservation lamp is performed. After step S1607, the second variable display setting process is performed in step S1608, and then this process ends.

Here, the details of the second variable display setting process in step S1608 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the second special change reservation area is "7" corresponding to the big hit. In addition, in step S1701, by determining whether or not the big hit schedule flag in the execution area of the second special change reservation area is set to ON, it is possible to determine whether or not the second variation display corresponding to the big win is performed. may be

When affirmative determination is made in step S1701, in step S1702, the special figure 2 jackpot determination flag indicating that the second variation display corresponding to the jackpot is being performed is set to ON. In the subsequent step S1703, it is determined whether or not the 15RS flag is set to ON in the execution area of the second special change reservation area. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1703, 15RS pattern setting processing is performed in step S1704.

If the determination in step S1703 is negative, it is determined in step S1705 whether or not the 8RS flag is turned on. If the determination in step S1705 is affirmative, 8RS pattern setting processing is performed in step S1706, and if the determination in step S1705 is negative, 8RN pattern setting processing is performed in step S1707.

As described above, the pattern setting process is a process for executing variable display corresponding to the variable information stored in the execution area in the special display devices 43a, 43b and the decorative pattern display device 42, and the special display device 43a, 43b, and the variation pattern (variation display time, stop mode, effect pattern, etc.) of the decorative pattern display device 42 are determined, and the variation pattern command is set.

That is, in steps S1704, S1706, and S1707, as the second variation time determination table referred to when setting the second variation time, in the case of the rush mode, the second short variation time determination table for the jackpot (Fig. 48 (m)) is selected, and in the case of the normal mode and the time saving mode, the second long fluctuation time determination table for the jackpot (see FIG. 48 (p)) is selected as a special case.

Then, referring to the selected second variation time determination table, the second variation time is determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the second special variation reservation area. The determined second variable time is stored (associated with) in the execution area of the second special variable reservation area.

Then, the second variation display, information indicating the variation pattern (either 15RS, 8RS, or 8RN), and information including the variation time are set in the variation pattern command. Furthermore, when the second long fluctuation time determination table for the jackpot is referred to, a second forced display command indicating that it is a special second fluctuation display in which the second fluctuation time is set short although it is a time saving mode is set. do. In the rush mode of the present embodiment, the decorative pattern display device 42 is configured not to display the decorative pattern, and therefore the ready-to-win pattern is not set.

After step S1704, step S1706, or step S1707, in step S1710, the special figure 2 displaying flag indicating that the second variable display is being performed in the second special display device 43b is set to ON, and in step S1711, the second After setting a value corresponding to the second variable time for the special figure 2 display timer that measures the remaining time of the variable display, this process is terminated.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S1701, in step S1708, a small hit determination flag indicating that the second variation display corresponding to the small hit is being performed is set to ON. In the following step S1709, after the small winning pattern setting process is performed, this process is performed.

In the small hit pattern setting process, as the second fluctuation time determination table referred to when setting the second fluctuation time, in the case of the rush mode, the second short fluctuation time determination table for the small hit (see FIG. 48 (n) ) is selected, and in the case of the normal mode and the time reduction mode, the normal second long fluctuation time determination table (see FIG. 48(o)) is selected.

Then, referring to the selected second variation time determination table, the second variation time is determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the second special variation reservation area. Furthermore, the second variation display, the information indicating the variation pattern (that it is a small hit), and the information including the variation time are set in the variation pattern command.

Returning to the description of FIG. 22, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1603, that is, when the second fluctuation display is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1609, and the special figure 2 display timer is subtracted.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S1610, and it is determined whether or not the predetermined fluctuation time has passed by taking into consideration the value of the special figure 2 display timer after the above subtraction. At this time, step S1610 is affirmatively determined when the value of the special figure 2 display timer becomes "0" when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed.

When a negative determination is made in step S1610, in step S1615, switching display setting is performed to continue the switching display (second variable display) of the second special display device 43b. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the second special display device 43b in the external output processing in the next normal processing. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the second special display device 43b is realized at the timing of the second special display control process, that is, every 4 ms. After step S1615, the process ends.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S1610, the special figure 2 display flag is turned off in step S1611, and the special figure 2 stop display setting for performing the stop display in the second special display device 43b in step S1612 conduct. Based on the setting contents of this special figure 2 stop display setting, in the external output process in the next normal process, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the second special display device 43b. That is, in the second special display device 43b, the mode corresponding to each big hit type, small hit, loss, etc. set in the second variable display setting process is stopped and displayed.

In addition, after step S1612, in step S1613, the sub-control device 262, to set the special figure 2 stop command to perform the stop display of the decorative design display device 42. As a result, the stop timings of the second special display device 43b and the decorative design display device 42 are reliably synchronized.

Subsequently, in step S1614, after performing the special figure 2 determination information setting process for performing the initial setting of the state and the switching setting of the game mode, this process is terminated.

Here, the special figure 2 determination information setting process of step S1614 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1801, with reference to the execution area of the second special variation reservation area, it is determined whether or not the small hit determination flag is set to ON. When affirmative determination is made in step S1801, the small hit determination flag is turned off in step S1802, and the small hit medium flag indicating that the small hit state is in progress is turned on in step S1803. Further, in step S1804, "2" is set to a round number counter for determining the number of rounds (the number of times the second variable winning device 32b is opened) to be executed during the small winning state.

In the subsequent step S1805, "4" is set in the winning status storage area to indicate that the first round of the small winning state is in progress. Furthermore, in step S1806, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the mode storage area is "21". If the determination in step S1806 is affirmative, that is, if it is the rush mode, then in step S1807, 1 Set the value "400" corresponding to an open period of .6 seconds. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1806 is negative, in step S1808 a value "25" corresponding to the open time of 0.1 second is set for the special variable timer.

After step S1807 and step S1808, in step S1809, 4, which is the maximum number of winning balls per round, is set to the winning counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning devices 32a and 32b. Set "4" to indicate the number of pieces. The value of the winning counter is variable by determining whether or not a ball has entered the variable winning devices 32a and 32b based on the detection information of the count switches 223a and 223b during the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process. When it is determined that a ball has entered the winning devices 32a and 32b, 1 is subtracted.

Then, in step S1810, a second opening process for opening the second variable winning device 32b is performed. Furthermore, in step S1811, 1 is subtracted from the value of the change number counter. In this embodiment, since the game mode is not changed only by winning a small prize, the remaining number of times of the rush mode and the time saving mode is reduced by one even at the stage when the variable display of the small prize is finished. It should be noted that the subtraction processing of the variation number counter may be configured to be performed only when "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area.

In the subsequent step S1812, a small winning start command for communicating the start of the winning state to the sub control device 262 is set. In the small hit command, information indicating the type of small hit (whether it is a small hit in rush mode) or information indicating the opening time of the first round (in this example, even if the type of small hit is different The opening time of the two rounds is common), etc., and the sub-control device 262 can also grasp the progress of the small winning state.

After step S1812, in step S1813, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 displaying flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S1813, this processing ends. On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made in step S1813, in step S1814, turn off the special figure 1 displaying flag, and in step S1815, the first variable display of the first special display device 43a is forced to "off" A process for stopping display (forced termination) in a corresponding manner is performed. In other words, when the second variable display is stopped in a mode of teaching a big win, by forcibly ending (erasing) the changing first variable display regardless of the content, after the big win state ends, The first variable display is also configured to start a new variable display.

Furthermore, in step S1816, in order to tell the sub-control device 262 side also to stop and display the first variable display, after setting the special figure 1 forced stop command, this process ends.

When the negative determination is made in step S1801, in step S1817, the execution area of the second special variation reservation area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit determination flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1817, the special figure 2 jackpot determination flag is turned off in step S1818, and the jackpot flag (stored in the second special change holding area) indicating that the jackpot state is in progress in step S1819 Turn on the special figure 2 jackpot medium flag) that indicates that the jackpot has been hit in the second variation display. Further, in step S1820, the execution area of the second special change reservation area is referenced to determine whether or not the 15RS flag is set.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1820, in step S1821, "15" is set to the round number counter for determining the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the first variable winning device 32a is opened). do. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1820 is negative, the round number counter is set to "8" in step S1822.

After steps S1821 and S1822, in step S1823, "1" is set in the win situation storage area. Further, in step S1824, the value "2000" corresponding to the opening period of 8 seconds, for example, is set for the special variable timer. Subsequently, in step S1825, "8" is set to the winning counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 32a.

Then, in step S1826, an opening command is set. After step S1826, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 displaying flag is set to ON in step S1813, and when a negative determination is made, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S1813, the special figure 1 displaying flag is turned off in step S1814, and the first variable display is forced to stop and display in a manner corresponding to "out" in step S1815 (forced Terminate), and after setting the special figure 1 forced stop command in step S1816, this process is terminated.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S1817, in step S1827, it is determined whether "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, either the time saving mode or the rush mode. game mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1827, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1827 is affirmative, in step S1828, the value of the variation counter is decremented by one.

In the subsequent step S1829, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1829, this processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1829 is affirmative, that is, if the first variation display and the second variation display are performed 70 times in total after the end of the jackpot state, in step S1830, the mode storage area , is set to "11" to indicate normal mode. After step S1830, in step S1831, a support end command is set to inform the sub-controller 262 of the transition to the normal mode (end of the high-ball entry mode), and then this process ends.

In this embodiment, the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 is acquired in step S514 of the starting winning process and stored in the first special change holding area, and whether or not the big win is determined in step S901 of the first change display setting process. The first winning lottery is configured by the process of determining . In addition, in step S505 of the starting winning process, the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 is acquired and stored in the second special change reservation area, and in step S1701 of the second change display setting process, it is determined whether or not it is a big win. The first lottery and the second lottery are configured by (in this example, if it does not become a big hit, it becomes a small lottery, so step S1701 performs both the first lottery and the second lottery. ). In addition, the fluctuation display setting process is configured by the process of setting the fluctuation pattern in step S904 and the like.

Next, variable winning device control processing for opening and closing the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b in step S207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the value set in the winning state storage area is "0", thereby determining whether or not the state is other than the winning state. If the determination in step S1201 is affirmative, that is, if the game is not in the winning state, the process ends. Incidentally, at the start of the big win state or the small win state, "1" or "4" is set in the win situation storage area in the first and second determination information setting processes.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the winning state is in progress (any one of "1" to "6" is set in the winning situation storage area), the process proceeds to step S1202. , subtract 1 from the value of the special variable timer. In subsequent step S1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the special variable timer is "0". If the determination in step S1203 is affirmative, it is determined in step S1204 whether or not "1" is set in the win situation storage area.

If the determination in step S1204 is affirmative, in step S1205, "2" is set in the win situation storage area. In the following step S1206, a value "7500" corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the first variable winning device 32a is set to the special variable timer.

After step S1206, in step S1207, a first opening process for opening the first variable prize winning device 32a is performed, and in step S1208, a round command is sent to the sub-control device 262 to inform the round start information. set. After that, this process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, it is determined in step S1209 whether or not "5" is set in the win situation storage area. In this embodiment, "5" is set in the winning state storage area in the interval period between the first round in the small winning state and the second round.

If a negative determination is made in step S1209, it is determined in step S1210 whether or not "3" is set in the win situation storage area. Although details will be described later, "3" is set in the winning state storage area when all the rounds in the jackpot state are completed and the ending period is started. If the determination in step S1210 is negative, that is, if it is not yet time to end the jackpot state, it is determined in step S1211 whether or not "6" is set in the winning state storage area. In this embodiment, "6" is set in the winning situation storage area in the second round in the small winning state.

If the determination in step S1211 is negative, the value of the round number counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1212. In the subsequent step S1213, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1213, that is, if there are still rounds to be executed, it is determined in step S1214 whether or not "4" is set in the win situation storage area. In this embodiment, "4" is set in the winning situation storage area in the first round in the small winning state.

When a negative determination is made in step S1214 (when "2" is set in the winning situation storage area), the process moves to step S1215, and "1" is set in the winning situation storage area. After that, in step S1216, a value "250" corresponding to the interval time (1 second) is set for the special variable timer.

In the following step S1217, "8" is set for the winning counter. Further, in step S1218, the first closing process for closing the first variable prize winning device 32a is performed, and in step S1219, an interval command is set to inform the sub-controller 262 of the information to start the interval. After that, this process is terminated.

Also, if the determination in step S1214 is affirmative, that is, if the first round of the small win state is completed, in step S1220, "5" is set in the win situation storage area. After that, in step S1221, a value "25" corresponding to the interval time (0.1 seconds) is set to the special variable timer.

In the following step S1222, "4" is set for the winning counter. Furthermore, in step S1223, after performing the second closing process for closing the second variable winning device 32b, this process is terminated.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if the time (open time or closed time) to maintain the open state or closed state of the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b remains moves to step S1224, and determines whether or not the game ball has entered the specific ball entering portion 145 provided in the specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b. Although details will be described later, in this process, a specific winning flag that is set to ON when detection is performed by the specific ball entry detection switch 223b that detects a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry section 145 is set to ON. It is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the specific ball entry portion 145 by determining whether or not it has been entered.

If a negative determination is made in step S1224, it is determined in step S1225 whether or not the value of the winning counter that measures the number of balls entering the first variable winning device 32a is "0". The winning counter is set to "8", which is the upper limit (prescribed number) of winnings per round at the start of the jackpot state and the start of the interval. Then, 1 is subtracted each time a game ball enters the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b.

If a negative determination is made in step S1225, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1225 is affirmative, that is, if the round end opportunity has arrived without waiting for the set period of the round to elapse, the process proceeds to step S1211. As a result, when the game balls enter the upper limit (8 or 4) of the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b during one round, the upper limit of the open period (30 seconds, 1.6 seconds, or 0.1 seconds), the round will end immediately at that point.

In addition, if the determination in step S1224 is affirmative, that is, if a game ball enters the specific ball entrance portion 145 in the small winning state as a trigger to cause a big winning state, in step S1226, After performing a specific prize winning process for generating a big win state (continuing the big win state), this process is terminated. Details of the specific winning process will be described later.

If the determination in step S1213 is affirmative, that is, if all the rounds in the jackpot state have been completed, the process proceeds to step S1227, and "3" is set in the win situation storage area. After step S1227, in step S1228, a value "2500" corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set for the special variable timer.

After step S1228, in step S1229, the winning counter is set to "7". Incidentally, when the processing for setting the ending after step S1227 is performed in the flow after the affirmative determination is made in step S1225, the value of the winning counter is "0". Then, if the value of the prize winning counter is set to "0" as it is at the start of the ending period, in the variable prize winning device control processing after 4 msec, affirmative determination is suddenly made in step S1225, and the ending period cannot be completed. Therefore, in step S1229, a provisional value other than "0" ("7" in this example) is set in the winning counter so that the ending period can be completed. Of course, another method may be used to complete the ending period.

After step S1229, in step S1230, the first closing process for closing the first variable prize winning device 32a is performed, and in subsequent step S1231, an ending command for transmitting information to the sub-control device 262 to start the ending. set. After that, this process is terminated.

Also, if the determination in step S1210 is affirmative, that is, if the ending period has ended and the time to end the jackpot state has arrived, the process proceeds to step S1232 to perform end setting processing. In the end setting process, setting of the mode storage area and setting of the change number counter are performed.

Here, the termination setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not one of the first and second jackpot medium flags is set to ON. If the determination is affirmative in step S1401, in step S1402, the corresponding one of the first special change reservation area or the second special change reservation area (either the first or second jackpot medium flag is set to ON ) execution area is referred to, and it is determined whether one of the 15RS flag and the 8RS flag is set to ON.

If the determination in step S1402 is affirmative, in step S1403 a value "21" corresponding to the rush mode is stored in the mode storage area. As a result, the rush mode is provided after the end of the jackpot state. In the subsequent step S1404, a rush start command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of starting the rush mode (shift to the rush stage).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1402, a value "12" corresponding to the time saving mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1405. As a result, the time saving mode is provided after the end of the jackpot state. In continuing step S1406, the time saving start command which tells sub-control device 262 to start the time saving mode (transition to a pullback stage) is set.

After step S1404 and step S1406, in step S1407, the flag during the first jackpot or the flag during the second jackpot that is set to ON is turned off. In the following step S1408, a value "0" indicating a state other than a winning state is set in the winning state storage area. Furthermore, in step S1409, a jackpot end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the end of the jackpot state. After that, in step S1410, after setting the value "70" corresponding to the upper limit of the number of fluctuations in the rush mode and the time saving mode to the fluctuation number counter, the process ends.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S1401, that is, when it is a small hit state, in step S1411, a ball entry counter for counting the number of game balls existing in the specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b. is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the number of game balls existing in the specific area 141 is "0". When the affirmative determination is made in step S1411, in step S1412, the small hit medium flag is turned off, in step S1413, "0" is set in the hit situation storage area, and in step S1414, the sub control device 262 A small winning end command is set to inform that the small winning state ends.

After that, in step S1415, it is determined whether or not the value of the change number counter is "0". In addition, the period of the rush mode and the time saving mode is until the first and second fluctuation displays are performed a total of 70 times, or until the big hit state occurs. When the fluctuation display ends and the small win starts, the value of the fluctuation counter is decremented by 1 (see step S1811). In the step S1415, it is determined whether or not the upper limit of the number of fluctuations in the rush mode or the time saving mode has been reached (70 times has been completed).

If a negative determination is made in step S1415, this processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1415 is affirmative, in step S1416 a value "11" corresponding to the normal mode is set in the mode storage area, and in step S1417 a support termination command is set, and then this process is executed. exit.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S1411, in step S1418, after the remaining ball monitoring flag for continuing to monitor the game balls in the specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b is set to ON, this processing is performed. exit. That is, when the game ball remains in the specific area 141, the small winning state does not end even when the small winning state (the second round of the small winning state) ends.

Here, the remaining ball monitoring process (step S307) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 11) will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1301, whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b is detected by the ball entry count switch 226 installed near the ball entry opening 142 of the specific area 141. Make an informed decision. When the determination in step S1301 is affirmative, in step S1302, 1 is added to the value of the ball entry counter that counts game balls existing in the specific area 141. FIG. In the following step S1303, the monitoring timer used for the remaining ball monitoring process is set to a predetermined time period during which the game ball detected by the entering ball count switch 226 should be ejected from the specific area 141. Set the value corresponding to . In this embodiment, it is configured not to exceed 2 seconds until the game ball entering the specific area 141 is ejected from the specific area 141 without any problem. "750" corresponding to seconds is set.

After step S1303, or if a negative determination is made in step S1301, in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the specific ball entering portion 145 based on the detection information of the specific ball entering detection switch 223b. to discriminate. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1304, in step S1305, a specific winning flag is set to ON. In the following step S1306, 1 is subtracted from the incoming ball counter value.

After step S1306, or when a negative determination is made in step S1304, in step S1307, whether or not a game ball has entered the non-specific ball entering portion 146 is detected as detection information of the non-specific ball entering detection switch 223c. Determine based on. If the determination in step S1307 is affirmative, in step S1308, the value of the incoming ball counter is decremented by one.

After step S1308, or if a negative determination is made in step S1307, it is determined in step S1309 whether or not the value of the incoming ball counter is "0". If the determination in step S1309 is negative, it is determined in step S1310 whether or not the value of the monitoring timer is "0". If the determination in step S1310 is negative, the value of the watchdog timer is decremented by 1 in step S1311, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S1310, that is, even when all the game balls are expected to be ejected from the specific area 141 of the second variable winning device 32b, game balls still remain. If so, in step S1312 error processing (for example, turning on the error display lamp 104, displaying an error on the data lamp, notifying the hall computer, etc.) is performed, and then this processing ends.

Also, if the determination in step S1309 is affirmative, it is determined in step S1313 whether or not a remaining ball monitoring flag that may be set when ending the small winning state is turned on. If a negative determination is made in step S1313, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1313 is affirmative, the flag for monitoring remaining balls is turned off in step S1314. In the subsequent step S1315, it is determined whether or not the flag during the first jackpot or the flag during the second jackpot is set to ON. If the determination in step S1315 is affirmative, that is, if a game ball enters the specific ball entering portion 145 in a small winning state and a big winning state occurs, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1315, since the process of ending the small hit state has not been performed yet, the small hit medium flag is turned off in step S1316, and in step S1317 the hit status storage area "0" is stored, and a small hit end command is set in step S1318.

After that, in step S1319, it is determined whether or not the value of the change number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1319, the processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1319 is affirmative, in step S1320 a value "11" corresponding to the normal mode is set in the mode storage area, and in step S1321 a support end command is set. exit.

Returning to the description of the variable winning device control process in FIG. 25, if the determination in step S1209 is affirmative, that is, if the interval period after the end of the first round in the small win state has ended, in step S1233, the win situation is stored. A value "6" corresponding to the second round of the small winning state is set for the area, and in step S1234, the special variable timer corresponds to the opening time of the second variable winning device 32b of 0.1 seconds. Set the value "25". Further, in step S1235, the second opening process for opening the second variable winning device 32b is performed, and then this process is terminated.

In addition, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1211, that is, when the second round (final round) of the small winning state is completed, in step S1236, the second closing process for closing the second variable winning device 32b. I do. After that, in step S1232, end setting processing is performed, and this processing ends.

Next, in step S1224 of the variable winning device control process (FIG. 25), a specific winning flag that indicates that a ball has entered the specific ball entering section 145 is set to ON. The winning process (step S1226) will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S1901, the specific winning flag is turned off. In the following step S1902, whether or not the flag during the big hit is set to ON (in this example, if two game balls enter the specific ball entering section 145 during the small hit, etc., the flag during the second jackpot is turned on) possible). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, the process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1902, a second closing process for closing the second variable winning device 32b is performed in step S1903. Furthermore, in step S1904, the flag during the small hit is turned off, and in step S1905, the flag during the big hit (flag during the second big hit) is turned on. In other words, when a game ball enters the specific ball entry portion 145 during the small winning state, the small winning state is immediately ended and the big winning state is started.

After that, in step S1906, it is determined whether or not the 15RS flag is set to ON in the execution area of the second special change reservation area. Incidentally, the jackpot type is determined by the first type determination process performed after it is determined that the small win is won in the starting winning process. If the determination in step S1906 is affirmative, in step S1907, the round number counter is set to "14". In other words, a 15RS big win state occurs, but since the small win state corresponds to the first round, the round number counter is set to "14", which is the number of remaining rounds.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1906 is negative, the round number counter is set to "7" in step S1908. In other words, an 8RS big win state occurs, but since the small win state corresponds to the first round, the round number counter is set to "7", which is the number of remaining rounds.

After steps S1907 and S1908, in step S1909, "1" is set in the win situation storage area. Further, in step S1910, the special variable timer is set to "500" corresponding to the opening period for teaching the occurrence of the big win state. After that, in step S1911, the winning counter is set to "8", and in step S1912, the sub-control device 262 is notified that the game ball has entered the specific ball entering section 145 and that a jackpot state has occurred. After setting the specific winning command, this process is terminated.

Next, the normal display control process in step S208 of the normal process (FIG. 10) will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal pattern interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the interval (normal pattern interval) set after the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41 is "0". do. When the negative determination is made in step S2101, ie, when it is the normal pattern interval, in step S2116, the value of the normal pattern interval timer is subtracted, and then this processing ends. That is, for example, when the general pattern interval is set to 1 second (1000 msec) and the general pattern interval timer is set to "249 ("250" in the case where step S2116 is performed before step S2101)" is set In this process, the value of the general pattern interval timer is subtracted by "1" every 4 msec, and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2101 is affirmative, that is, if it is not the normal interval period, in step S2102, the support period flag indicating that the opening and closing control of the second start-up winning device @ is in progress is turned on. Determine whether it is set or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2102, in step S2103, it is determined whether or not a normal pattern display flag indicating whether or not the normal pattern display device 41 is performing variable display is on. In addition, when the normal pattern display flag is ON, it is considered that the normal pattern display device 41 is in the process of variable display.

If the determination in step S2103 is negative, the process advances to step S2104 to determine whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. When a negative determination is made in step S2104, that is, when no variation display of the normal symbol display device 41 is suspended, this processing is terminated as it is. In addition, for example, when a negative determination is made in step S2104, the normal symbol display device 41 performs standby display setting for deriving a display mode corresponding to a variable standby state in which variable display is not performed. may be In other words, the normal design display device 41, after the fluctuation stop, its stop mode is maintained during the normal pattern interval period (in the form showing the result of the entrance ball support lottery), but the normal pattern interval period ends. Then, the display mode may be switched to indicate the variable standby state.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2104 is affirmative, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc in step S2105. In the subsequent step S2106, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal change reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserve areas of the normal variable reserve area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

After that, in step S2107, normal pattern fluctuation setting processing for setting and starting the fluctuation display of the normal pattern display device 41 is executed.

Here, the general pattern fluctuation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 30 . First, in step S2301, the normal pattern display flag indicating that the normal pattern display device 41 is normally displaying the variable pattern is turned on. In the following step S2302, the win state storage area is referenced to determine whether or not "0" is stored, that is, whether or not the current state is other than the win state. If the determination in step S2302 is affirmative, that is, if the win state is not in effect, then in step S2303 it is determined whether a value of "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area. It is determined whether or not the player is in the state of entering a ball (time-saving mode or rush mode).

When the affirmative determination is made in step S2303, in step S2304, for the normal pattern display timer for measuring the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal pattern display device 41, the normal pattern fluctuation display time Set to "100" for 0.4 seconds.

After that, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal variation reservation area is "27 to 29".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2305, the process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, if the ball-entering support lottery for determining whether or not to open the first support starting prize-winning device 33b is won, the ball-entering support lottery is won in step S2306. Set the entry support flag to indicate that it has been done. After step S2306, the process ends.

In addition, if step S2302 or step S2303 is determined to be negative, that is, if it is in a hit state or a low ball entry state, in step S2307, for the normal pattern display timer, the normal pattern fluctuation display time Set to "15000" to make the time 60 seconds. Furthermore, in the above step S2305, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 in the execution area of the normal variation reservation area is "27 to 29". If the determination is affirmative, in step S2306, the ball entry support flag is set to ON, and then this processing ends. In addition, the fluctuation display time of normal symbols, the winning probability in the ball entry support lottery, etc. can be appropriately set for each pachinko machine model. , may be configured to be higher than the winning probability of the ball entry support lottery in the low ball entry state.

Returning to the description of FIG. 29, after step S2107, in step S2108, subtraction display processing of the normal reservation display device 44 (normal reservation lamp) corresponding to the fact that the number of reservations of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is reduced by one. I do. In other words, when both the left and right normal holding lamps are in a blinking state, the right normal holding lamp is lit while the left normal holding lamp is blinking, and the left normal holding lamp is in a blinking state and the right normal holding lamp is in a blinking state. When the normal hold lamp is lit, both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, and when both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the right normal hold lamp is lit while the left normal hold lamp is lit. The reservation lamps are extinguished, and when the left normal reservation lamp is lit and the right normal reservation lamp is extinguished, processing for extinguishing both the left and right normal reservation lamps is performed. After step S2108, this processing ends.

In addition, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2103, that is, when the variable display is being performed on the normal symbol display device 41, the process proceeds to step S2109 to perform the process of subtracting the normal symbol display timer. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the normal diagram display timer is decremented by 1.

Subsequently, in step S2110, it is determined whether or not the count value of the normal diagram display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. When it is determined affirmatively in step S2110, the normal pattern display flag is turned off in step S2111, and the normal pattern stop display setting for performing stop display on the normal pattern display device 41 is performed in step S2112. In other words, when winning the entry support lottery (if the entry support flag is set to ON), both the left and right pair of normal pattern lamps of the normal design display device 41 are lit, and if it is out Turn on only the normal map lamp on the left.

Then, it progresses to step S2113 and performs normal figure discrimination|determination information setting processing. Here, normal figure discrimination information setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. 31 .

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the ball entry support flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S2401, this processing ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, in step S2402, a normal variable flag for determining whether or not the first support starting prize winning device 33b is in the open state is set to ON.

In the subsequent step S2403, it is determined whether or not one of "12, 21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the player is in a high ball entry state. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, in step S2404, the opening time of the first support starting prize winning device 33b is set to the normal variable timer for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the first support starting prize winning device 33b. is set to "450" to make the time equal to 1.8 seconds.

Further, in step S2405, an opening count counter for counting the number of times (remaining number of times) to open the first support starting prize winning device 33b is set to "3" so as to open the first support starting prize winning device 33b three times. After step S2405, the entry support flag is turned off in step S2408, and the support period flag is turned on in step S2409. Further, in step S2410, after setting the first support starting prize winning device 33b to the open state, this process is terminated.

Further, if the determination in step S2403 is negative, that is, if the ball is in a low ball entry state, in step S2406, the opening time of the first support starting prize winning device 33b is set to 0.2 seconds with respect to the normal variable timer. set to "50" as much as possible. In the following step S2407, the number-of-opening counter is set to "2" so as to open the first support starting prize winning device 33b twice. After step S2407, in step S2408, the ball entry support flag is turned off, in step S2409, the flag during the support period is turned on, and in step S2410, after setting the first support start winning device 33b to the open state , the process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 29, after step S2113, in step S2114, after setting a value corresponding to the general pattern interval period (for example, 1 second) to the general pattern interval timer, this process ends.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S2110, in step S2115, the switching display setting for continuously performing the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41 (switching display for alternately lighting the left and right pair of normal pattern lamps). I do. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal to the effect that the switching display is normally performed to the symbol display device 41 is output. As a result, switching display (variation display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the normal display control process, that is, every 4 ms. After step S2115, the process ends.

Next, the starting winning device control processing of step S209 of the normal processing (FIG. 10) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the support period flag is on. If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S2201 is affirmative, the value of the normal variable timer is subtracted by 1 in step S2202.

In subsequent step S2203, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if it is the period in which the open/closed state of the first support starting prize winning device 33b is maintained, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2203 is affirmative, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the normal variable flag is on. If the determination in step S2204 is affirmative, that is, if the first support starting prize winning device 33b is currently in the open state and the timing to close it has arrived, the normal variable flag is turned off in step S2205. In the subsequent step S2206, the value of the opening number counter is decremented by 1, and in step S2207, the first support starting prize winning device 33b is set to be closed.

After that, in step S2208, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening number counter is "0". If the determination in step S2208 is affirmative, the support period flag is turned off in step S2209, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2208, that is, if there is a remaining number of times that the first support start-up winning device 33b is opened a plurality of times, then in step S2210 it corresponds to the interval time for the normal variable timer. After setting a value (for example, "250"), this process ends.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S2204, that is, in the interval period during which the first support starting prize winning device 33b is opened a plurality of times (the first support starting prize winning device 33b is in a closed state), the interval period ends. When the timing to turn on has arrived, the normal variable flag is set to ON in step S2211. Furthermore, in step S2212, it is determined whether or not "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area. If the determination in step S2212 is affirmative, in step S2213 a value "450" corresponding to an open time of 1.8 seconds is set for the normal variable timer. On the other hand, if the determination in step S2212 is negative, in step S2214 a value "50" corresponding to an open time of 0.2 seconds is set for the normal variable timer.

After step S2213 and step S2214, in step S2215, setting is performed to open the first support starting prize winning device 33b. After that, this process is terminated. In addition, when the first support starting prize winning device 33b is in the open state, when the game ball enters the first support starting prize winning device 33b in a specified number (for example, four), the first support start The winning device 33b may be configured to be immediately closed.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt processing will be described first with reference to FIG. 33, and then the main processing will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing reception interrupt processing executed by the payout control device 311. As shown in FIG. The reception interrupt process is a process that is executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 . When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is put on standby for a while, and reception interrupt processing is executed.

When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513 in step S3001, and the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is stored in step S3002. Turns on the command reception flag and terminates this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is used to store the next received command in the next storage area. is updated.

In this embodiment, the reception processing of a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is performed by interrupt processing executed when the command is received. In timer interrupt processing, it is checked whether a command has been received before command determination processing (step S3201) is performed, and if a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if the command has not been received, the process may proceed to the command determination process. In such a case, whether or not the command has been received is checked by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is activated upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S3101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, RAM access is permitted in step S3103, and an external interrupt vector is set in step S3104.

After that, in step S3106, it is determined whether information on the occurrence of power failure is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 or not. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of RAM 513 . It is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup by checking whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If power failure occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S3115. Transition.

At step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and at step S3116 the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S3114 the interrupt is permitted.

On the other hand, on the condition that power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106, and that the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, processing at the time of power recovery process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before the power cutoff is restored, in step S3110, the power cutout occurrence information is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag for permitting the payout of prize balls is cleared. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. FIG. Further, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interruption is permitted in step S3114, in the process of step S3122, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is set, it means that the power has been shut off, so the processing from step S3123 onwards is performed as power failure processing at the time of power failure. In the power failure process, first, in step S3123, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited, and in the next step S3124, command determination processing, which will be described later, is executed. After that, in step S3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area, in step S3126 the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and in step S3127 the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 513a. , the RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 513 .

In the processing of step S3122, the power failure occurrence information is confirmed after the processing that is performed when the power is turned on is completed. less and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, the return can be easily performed, and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt processing, first, a command is acquired from the main control device 261, and determination processing of the command is performed (step S3201). This command determination processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311 . In the command determination process (steps S3124, S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 33).

If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from the main controller 261, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command reception flag is on in step S3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of command read out from the RAM 513 is discriminated in the processing of steps S3304 to S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command, and in step S3306 whether it is a prize ball command It is determined whether or not

If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307. Since the controller 261 has instructed the initialization of the RAM 513, the work area (area) of the RAM 513 other than the stack area is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. After that, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout permission of prize balls is set.

As described above, the main controller 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. is performed, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261, the RAM 513 is initialized due to the timing of initialization being shifted, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Also, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of prize balls can be reliably set.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307, this command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. FIG. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized while the payout permission flag is set. Since the payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, it will not be received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set (step S3309) while the payout permission flag is turned on, it will not be paid out if there are prize balls remaining. A bad effect occurs and a loss is given to the player, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, the loss to the player can be prevented.

Also, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power shutdown, In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is power-off occurrence information and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power-off, payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), in step S3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored. , the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311 to allow the payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the commands to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. and memorize it. Since the payout of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is performed based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the payout of prize balls. . In addition, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so the prize balls can be paid out early for the win. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

It should be noted that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), nor a payout return command (step S3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process is ended without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, returning to the flowchart of FIG. 35, description will be made. After completion of the command determination process, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not a CR unit connection signal indicating electrical connection with the CR unit has been received from the CR unit connection board 314. FIG. If the determination in step S3202 is affirmative, in step S3203, a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit is electrically connected is transmitted to the firing control circuit 312 of the power supply and firing control device 310.

After step S3203, or when a negative determination is made in step S3202, it is determined in step S3204 whether or not the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is terminated as it is. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main controller 261 .

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3204, the state recovery switch 321 is checked in step S3205, and if it is determined that the state recovery operation has started, the state recovery operation is executed. By this process, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated forward and reverse, and the ball clogging is resolved (returned to a normal state). .

After that, in step S3206, the setting of the lower tray full state or the lower tray full state cancellation state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower tray 15. FIG. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined by the detection signal of the full detection switch. Execute the setting of the full-dish release state. Further, in step S3207, setting of the no-ball-in-tank state (out-of-ball state) or no-ball-in-tank canceled state (with-ball state) is executed according to the change in the state of the ball in the tank. That is, the no-ball-in-tank state is determined by the detection signal of the no-tank-ball switch, the no-ball-in-tank state, the no-ball-in-tank state are set, the no-ball-in-tank state, and the no-tank-ball canceled state are executed. Run the settings.

After that, in step S3208, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a prize ball and rental ball payout control process is executed. Specifically, payout number setting processing is performed in step S3209, motor control state acquisition processing is performed in step S3210, and motor drive processing is performed in step S3211.

In step S3212, the state return switch 321 is checked, and on the condition that the ball removal is not possible and the ball removal operation is not started, the payout motor is driven to execute the ball removal process. In the subsequent step S3213, control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the balls are clogged. After that, it returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt processing.

Next, normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 in step S3902. A command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 . The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored and read, the store pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In the subsequent step S3903, pending information storage processing is performed to store the information of the leading command output from the main controller 261 in the pending information storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262. FIG. In the starting command, as described above, which of the first normal start-up winning device 33a, the first support start-up winning device 33b, or the second start-up winning device 33c is the trigger for the variable display? , information indicating whether it is variation information corresponding to a big hit or a small hit, information indicating a big hit type, information indicating a reach type, and information indicating a fluctuation time.

The holding information storage area of the sub-controller 262 includes four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas), similar to the first special variable holding area and the second special variable holding area of the main control device 261, and one a first pending information storage area comprising one execution area; and a second pending information storage area comprising one pending area (first pending area) and one execution area. In the first pending information storage area, in accordance with the reception history of the starting command based on the first variable display (information stored in the first special variable pending area), information on whether it is a big hit, whether it is a big hit, whether it is a small hit Information on whether or not, reach patterns, and information (variation information) regarding variation display such as variation time are stored in chronological order. Also, in the second pending information storage area, variable information is stored chronologically according to the reception history of the preceding command based on the second variable display (information stored in the second special variable pending area). By adopting this configuration, the variation information related to the first variation display triggered by the ball entering the first normal start prize winning device 33a and the second variation triggered by the ball entering the second start prize winning device 33c Variation information about the display can be retained and stored respectively. As a result, it is possible for the sub-controller 262 to grasp not only the execution areas of the first and second special variable reservation areas of the main controller 261, but also the variation information stored in the reservation areas. .

Here, the pending information storage process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the leading command for the first variable display has been received (whether or not the leading command for the first variable display has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, in step S4102, the first variation pending counter Nd for counting the pending number of variable information stored in the first pending information storage area is incremented by one.

In the following step S4103, the information on whether or not the jackpot included in the starting command, the information on the type of jackpot, the reach pattern, the information on the first fluctuation time, etc. Store in area.

Further, in the subsequent step S4104, the advance notice information storage processing is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, there is a case where mutually related effect displays are intentionally derived in a plurality of consecutive variable displays (so-called "continuous advance notice" is performed). Here, the value of the continuous notice counter for determining whether or not to perform the continuous notice and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of continuous notice are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the first reservation information Of the areas, the change information is stored in the newly stored holding area in step S4103.

The continuous notice counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 49, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 49). The continuous announcement counter is updated periodically, and each time, the value of the continuous announcement counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous announcement counter buffer).

The advance notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The notice type counter is updated periodically, and each time, the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer).

Then, in the notice information storing process, when the change information is stored in the pending information storage area, the value of the continuous notice counter and the value of the notice type counter stored in the continuous notice counter buffer and the notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Furthermore, each pending area and execution area of the pending information storage area is provided with a continuous announcement flag that is turned on when it is determined that the continuous announcement is derived.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice propriety determination table that is taken into consideration when determining whether or not to perform continuous notices, and a notice table that is taken into account when deciding the form of continuous notices. A plurality of notice adequacy determination tables and notice tables are provided, respectively, and the notice adequacy determination tables and notice tables to be considered are selected according to the variation information.

After step S4104, in step S4105, continuous announcement lottery processing for determining whether or not to execute continuous announcement is performed. In the continuous announcement lottery process of step S4105, it is confirmed whether or not there is a reservation area in which the continuous announcement flag is already set to ON. Therefore, if the existence of the holding area in which the continuous notice flag is set is not confirmed, and furthermore, in the holding first area, when only the variation information corresponding to the complete deviation (the deviation in which the reach state does not occur) is stored , It is designed to draw lots for continuous notices. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that there is a reserved area in which the continuous notice flag is set, the continuous notice lottery is not performed.

In addition, in the continuous notice lottery process of step S4105, when the value of the first variable suspension counter Nd is "2" or more, based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first suspension information storage area, Refer to the announcement success/failure determination table corresponding to the jackpot type, reach pattern, and game mode (the one corresponding to the jackpot is easier to win than the one corresponding to the loss), and determines whether or not to execute the continuous notice. . Furthermore, when it is decided to execute the continuous notice, based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first reservation information storage area, the notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, reach pattern and game mode to determine whether or not to execute continuous advance notice. In addition, the continuous notice flags of all the reservation areas in which the variation information is stored are turned on among the reservation areas of the first reservation information storage area. However, the continuous notice flag of the execution area is not turned on.

After step S4105, in step S4106, a hold icon setting process for additionally displaying one hold icon 461 indicating that the first variable display is held and stored in the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed.

As shown in FIG. 45(a), in a suspension display area 462 provided at the bottom of the decorative design display device 42, a suspension icon 461 imitating a "floating ring" is displayed. The pending display area 462 of the present embodiment includes an execution corresponding area 462a corresponding to the execution area of the pending information storage area and a pending corresponding area corresponding to the pending areas of the pending information storage area (first and second pending information storage areas). 462b, and up to five pending icons 461 can be displayed. In this embodiment, the pending icon 461 corresponding to the second variable display is not derived.

In addition, the pending icon 461 may be derived in a manner suggesting the degree of expectation of the jackpot of the corresponding variable display. Hereinafter, the pending icon 461 of such a mode is also referred to as "prefetching pending icon 463". The look-ahead suspension icon 463 of this embodiment is derived in a mode in which the character uses a "floating ring". Furthermore, a plurality of types of characters of the look-ahead suspension icon 463 are prepared, and the pattern of the look-ahead suspension icon 463 is associated with the degree of winning expectation for the occurrence of the big win state (big win expectation). As a result, the look-ahead suspension icon 463 is ranked with respect to the degree of expectation for the big win according to its aspect, and by deriving the look-ahead suspension icon 463, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for the big win (perform a look-ahead suspension notice effect). It is configured.

Further, when the prefetching pending icon 463 is derived, the pattern of the prefetching pending icon 463 changes until the variable display corresponding to the prefetching pending icon 463 is digested (a pending change effect is derived). ). In other words, in the pending icon setting process of step S4107, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the prefetch pending icon 463 should be derived. be done. On the other hand, in the case of winning, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to perform the holding change effect, and in the case of winning, the holding change flag of the corresponding holding area is set to ON, and the pattern of the look-ahead holding icon 463 is as follows. An upper limit pattern that can be finally displayed and a provisional pattern that has a lower (lower rank) degree of expectation for a big win than the upper limit pattern and is to be displayed first are determined. The provisional pattern may be configured so that there is an option to display only the default pending icon 461 at first. On the other hand, in the case of no winning, one pattern is determined as the pattern of the look-ahead pending icon 463 .

Then, basically, among the reserved icons 461 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, processing is performed such that the reserved icon 461 of the determined pattern is displayed on the right side of the rightmost one. will be Further, in the present embodiment, when the prefetching pending icon 463 is derived to the pending display area 462 in step S4106, the prefetching pending effect flag is turned on.

After step S4106, or if a negative determination is made in step S4101, in step S4107 it is determined whether or not the leading command for the second variable display has been received (the leading command for the second variable display is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). or not). If a negative determination is made in step S4107, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S4107 is affirmative, in step S4108, the second variation pending counter Ne that counts the pending number of second variable information stored in the second pending information storage area is incremented by one.

After that, in step S4109, information on whether or not the jackpot contained in the starting command, information on the type of jackpot, information on whether or not it is a small hit, reach pattern, and information on the second fluctuation time, etc. are stored as second pending information Store in the first area among the empty reserved areas of the area. After step S4109, the process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 37, after step S3903 or when a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, and whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process is performed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed since. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step S3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the process moves to step S3913.

In step S3905, update processing of various counters is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38, the upper, middle, and lower symbols used to set the decorative symbol counter CO at the time of the jackpot, and the outlier symbols of the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, numerical values change randomly.

The jackpot decorative pattern counter CO determines the pattern (jackpot pattern) when the fluctuation of the decorative pattern display device 42 is stopped when the jackpot state occurs. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative pattern counter CO is used. has nine counter values (0 to 8). That is, the jackpot decoration pattern counter CO is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 8, and returns to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 8).

Then, when a variation pattern command corresponding to a big hit with a rush is received from the main controller 261, based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates counter values with decorative patterns), for example, if the counter value is 0, "1 " (double number), and if it is 1, "2" (double number), and so on. This jackpot decorative pattern counter CO is periodically updated in the counter update processing of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-controller 262 receives a variation pattern command as described later. In this embodiment, the jackpot decoration pattern counter CO is stored in the jackpot decoration pattern counter buffer of the RAM 553, but the counter value is referred to at the timing of receiving the variation pattern command, etc., without storing in the buffer. You may do so.

Also, when receiving a variation pattern command corresponding to a time-saving jackpot, for example, if the counter value is 0 or 1, "2" (second row), and if it is 2 to 4, "4" (second row) , 5 and 6 are "6" (double), and 7 and 8 are "8" (double), and so on.

The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the combinations of the stop symbols in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the lottery is lost. Since one of the nine decorative patterns is displayed in the row, nine counter values (0 to 8) are prepared for each row. A stopped pattern in the upper pattern display area is determined by the upper pattern counter CL, a stopped pattern in the middle pattern display area is determined by the medium pattern counter CM, and a stopped pattern in the lower pattern display area is determined by the lower pattern counter CR.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical value of the R register built into the CPU 551 . That is, when each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. . The pattern counters CL, CM, CR are updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combinations of the pattern counters CL, CM, CR are the front-rear off reach pattern buffer of the RAM 553, the non-front-rear off reach pattern buffer, and the complete It is stored in any of the outlier pattern buffers.

Here, updating processing of each symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 39, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL, and in step S4002, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the medium symbol counter CM. The top, middle, and bottom pattern counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the lower symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, the determination in step S4001 is affirmative. Also, if the upper symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update processing, the determination in step S4002 is affirmative. If it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL (YES in step S4001), the process advances to step S4003 to update the upper symbol counter CL. If it is time to update the medium design counter CM (YES in step S4002), the process proceeds to step S4004 to update the medium design counter CM. Furthermore, if it is time to update the lower design counter CR (NO in both steps S4001 and S4002), the process proceeds to step S4005 to update the lower design counter CR. In updating the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the lower 3-bit value of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 8 is subtracted if the addition result exceeds the upper limit value. The calculation result is used as the current value of the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the CL, CM, and CR updating process, the upper, middle, and lower pattern counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and the update timings of the respective counter values overlap. no. As a result, one set of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated each time the updating process is executed three times.

After that, in step S4006, it is determined whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of ready-to-win symbols (the symbol in the upper symbol display area and the symbol in the lower symbol display area are the same). If it is a combination of ready-to-win symbols (S4006 is YES), then in step S4007, whether or not it is a combination of jackpot symbols (the left and right symbol display areas are the same as the middle symbol display area). determine whether If the determination in step S4007 is affirmative, this processing is terminated without storing the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM553.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, it is determined in step S4008 whether or not the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of front and rear deviated symbols. If the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of front and rear out-of-order patterns (front-to-rear out-of-reach reach) (S4008 is YES), the process proceeds to step S4009, and the combination of the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the RAM 553. It is stored in the out-of-reach pattern buffer, and this processing ends. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of symbols other than front-rear deviation (Reach other than front-rear deviation) (NO in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4010, and the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time. are stored in the ready-to-win pattern buffer of the RAM 553 except for front and back deviation, and this processing is terminated.

Also, if the combination is other than the ready-to-win pattern (NO in S4006), the combination of the losing pattern counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of losing patterns (completely missing patterns), so in step S4011, the The combination of the lost pattern counters CL, CM, and CR at the time is stored in the complete lost pattern buffer of the RAM 553, and this process is terminated.

Returning to the description of FIG. 37, a hold process is performed in step S3906. The suspension process will be described below with reference to FIG.

First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command for the first variation display has been received (whether or not the variation pattern command for the first variation display has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If the determination in step S4201 is affirmative, then in step S4202 the value of the first variation holding counter Nd is subtracted by one.

In subsequent step S4203, a process of shifting the data stored in the first pending information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data (including the continuous notice flag) stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the first reserved information storage area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of →execution area, second reserved area→first reserved area, third reserved area→second reserved area, fourth reserved area→third reserved area.

After step S4203, in step S4204, an advance notice setting process is performed to determine the type of display effect used for continuous advance notice. In the notice setting process of step S4204, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag (see the continuous notice lottery process of step S4105) in the execution area of the reservation information storage area is on. is not performed, this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made, based on the variation information of the variation pattern command, it is determined whether it is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, what is the type, if it is not a jackpot, what is the reach pattern, etc. , and determine the type of continuous notice by referring to the corresponding table. The continuous announcement of the type determined here is derived at the desired timing for the corresponding variable display.

After step S4204, in step S4205, pending icon shift processing for shifting the pending icon 461 displayed on the decorative design display device 42 is performed. Each pending area and execution area of the pending information storage area is provided with a pending icon storage area for storing the type of the pending icon 461, and the information on the pending icon 461 is also stored in the above pending information storage. It is shifted by area data shift processing.

The pending icon shift process is a process for redrawing the pending icon 461 in accordance with the data shift. , the leftmost pending icon 461 is deleted, and the pending icon 461 located on the right side thereof is shifted to the left by one (the display location is moved).

In this embodiment, in step S4205, prior to the process of redrawing the pending icon 461, if there is a pending area in which the pending change flag is set to ON, the pending change effect of the prefetch pending icon 463 is displayed. A lottery is held to decide whether or not to perform the process, and if a lottery is won, the pattern of the look-ahead pending icon 463 is changed to a higher-ranked one (however, the rank of the upper limit pattern is not exceeded). In addition, when it is determined that there is no pending area in which the pending change flag is set to ON, the prefetch pending effect flag is turned OFF. Further, by changing the pattern of the prefetching pending icon 463, when the prefetching pending icon 463 reaches the upper limit pattern, the prefetching pending effect flag is turned off and the pending change flag is turned off. ing.

After step S4205, or if a negative determination is made in step S4201, in step S4206 it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command for the second variation display has been received (the variation pattern command for the second variation display is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). stored in the memory). If a negative determination is made in step S4206, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S4206 is affirmative, then in step S4207 the value of the second variation holding counter Ne is subtracted by 1. In subsequent step S4208, a process of shifting the data stored in the second pending information storage area is executed. This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first reserved area of the second reserved information storage area to the execution area. After step S4208, this processing ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 37, display setting processing is performed in step S3907. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various arithmetic processing such as generation of display commands to be output to the display control device 45 and command output settings are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 is determined. For example, when a variation pattern command is received, the sub-control device 262 refers to the corresponding table based on the variation type, variation time, stop design, etc., and determines the display pattern, etc. of the variation display of decorative symbols. Then, it performs control such as outputting the determined item to the display control device 45 as a display command.

In addition, the display control device 45 performs drawing processing according to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts the variable display of the decorative design on the decorative design display device 42. FIG. In addition, once the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 261, decoration is performed in cooperation with the sub-controller 262 and the display controller 45 until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses. Variation display of symbols (effect variation display) and the like are continued.

Further, when starting the effect variation display corresponding to the first variation display, when the continuous notice flag in the execution area of the first reservation information storage area is ON, each situation is based on the variation information of the variation pattern command By referring to the table corresponding to , the type of continuous notice to be derived to the effect variable display corresponding to the first variable display is determined, the derivation of the notice effect different from the continuous notice is determined, the effect button 125, etc. display corresponding to the operation of . Furthermore, in the display setting process of the step S3907, the process (hit display process) for controlling the effect during the big hit is also performed.

Here, the variable display setting process performed in the display setting process of step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, as a display mode in the decorative pattern display device 42 of the present embodiment, basically, in the normal mode and the time saving mode, the first effect variation display corresponding to the first variation display (first variation corresponding effect display) is performed, and in the rush mode, a second effect variation display (second variation corresponding effect display) corresponding to the second variation display is performed.

In the normal mode, as shown in FIG. 45(a), the variable display of decorative patterns is performed to teach or suggest the results of the winning lottery or the like according to the combinations that are stopped and displayed. Three decorative symbols of the same number are stopped and displayed side by side on the activated line (stopped and displayed in combination with the winning symbols) to indicate the occurrence of a big winning state. Furthermore, a pending icon 461 is displayed along with the display of the decorative pattern.

The time saving mode basically has the same aspect as the normal mode, and only the background display is different. A pending icon 461 is also displayed.

On the other hand, in rush mode, as shown in FIG. 45(b), the decoration pattern is not displayed. Instead, for example, an animation is derived in which the character advances in the sea, and a "small win" is taught by a display mode in which a school of fish passes by or flutters, a large creature such as a whale appears, and a treasure chest is discovered. A "jackpot" is taught by a display mode such as. Furthermore, the background is set bright when the total number of rotations of the first and second variable display after the start of the rush mode is between 0 and 40, and the background is set slightly dark when between 41 and 70. , the background becomes darker at the 70th spin, and a display is derived in which the character floats near the ship.

Further, based on the detection of the entering ball count switch 226, as a display suggesting a chance of a big win, a fish shadow may be derived, or an appearing character may perform a predetermined action. Suggestion is that if no big hit occurs and the value of the incoming ball counter becomes "0", the display mode will return). Furthermore, when a jackpot state (jackpot hit) occurs based on the ball entering the specific ball entering portion 145, the decorative pattern display device 42 gives priority to the other displays, and displays the indication of the occurrence of the jackpot state. It is desirable to

In addition, in the rush mode, it may be possible to select from a pattern effect mode in which decorative patterns are displayed and an animation effect mode in which decorative patterns are not displayed. However, the pending icon 461 is not displayed in either production mode. In addition, as a pattern production mode, for example, when a decorative pattern is stopped in combination with a chance pattern (a whale pattern is stopped and displayed on the effective line from the reach state), a small win is obtained, and the decorative pattern is doubled. It is conceivable to configure such that a combination of jackpot symbols is stopped and displayed to win a jackpot.

First, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not a second variation pattern command corresponding to the second variation display has been received. Various variation information included in the first or second variation pattern command may be configured to be stored in the execution area of the corresponding pending information storage area, or may be stored in a separate storage area. may be configured. Furthermore, for example, when the process corresponding to the reception of the second variation pattern command in the pending process (see FIG. 41) is performed, the second variation reception flag is turned on, and when the affirmative determination is made in step S4501, the The configuration may be such that the second variation reception flag is turned off, and in step S4501, by checking the second variation reception flag, it may be determined whether or not the second variation pattern command has been received.

If the determination in step S4501 is affirmative, it is determined in step S4502 whether or not "21" is stored in the mode storage area.

If the determination is affirmative in step S4502, that is, if it is the rush mode, in step S4503, information on which one of the big hit and small hit included in the second variation pattern command, the big hit type, and A second effect variable display setting process for determining the pattern of the second effect variable display is performed based on the second variable time or the like. After step S4503, the process proceeds to step S4506, which will be described later.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S4502, that is, when it is the normal mode or the time saving mode, in step S4504, the second effect variation display for forcibly deriving the second effect variation display corresponding to the second variation display is performed. Determine whether or not a forced display command has been received.

If a negative determination is made in step S4504, the process proceeds to step S4506, which will be described later. That is, in the normal mode and the time saving mode, basically, even if the second variable display is started on the second special display device 43b, the corresponding effect display (second effect variable display) in the decorative design display device 42 is It is designed not to be derived.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4503, that is, if the second variation display corresponding to the jackpot is started in the normal mode or the time saving mode, as a special case, the second effect variation display is performed in step S4505. is performed in the decorative symbol display device 42 in a special second effect variable display setting process for deriving variable display of decorative symbols in the same manner as the first variable effect display. In addition, in the normal mode and the time saving mode, even if the second variable display is performed, there is no change in the mode of the pending icon 461, but only when the special second effect variable display setting process is performed, the second variable display The pending icon 461 corresponding to the first variable display that is performed in parallel is made to correspond to the second variable display, or if the first variable display is not performed, the second variable display is displayed. It may be configured such that the corresponding hold icon 461 is derived.

After step S4505 or step S4503, or when negative determination is made in step S4501 or step S4504, it is determined whether or not the first variation pattern command is received in step S4506. If a negative determination is made in step S4506, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S4506 is affirmative, it is determined in step S4507 whether or not "21" is stored in the mode storage area.

If a negative determination is made in step S4507, that is, if it is normal mode or time saving mode, in step S4508, information on which jackpot included in the first variation pattern command, jackpot type, reach pattern, and , the first variable effect display setting process for determining the pattern of the first variable effect display based on the first variable time and the like. After step S4508, the process ends.

Further, if the determination in step S4507 is affirmative, that is, if the rush mode is set, in step S4509, a first forced display command for forcibly deriving the first effect variation display corresponding to the first variation display. is received.

If a negative determination is made in step S4509, this processing ends. That is, in the rush mode, basically, even if the first variable display is started on the first special display device 43a, the decorative pattern display device 42 does not derive the corresponding effect display (first effect variable display). It has become.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S4509 is affirmative, that is, if the first variation display corresponding to the big win is started in the rush mode, the first effect variation display is decorated as a special case in step S4510. In the symbol display device 42, a special first effect variable display setting process for deriving in the same manner as the second effect variable display is performed. After step S4510, the process ends.

In addition, in the special first effect variable display setting process and the special second effect variable display setting process, by determining whether or not the value of the variation counter is "70", the variable display is displayed after the jackpot state. First rotation determination processing for determining whether or not it is the first rotation of the variable display, and effect interrupt determination processing for determining whether or not the decorative pattern display device 42 is in a state where the effect variation display is not performed. If either one is positively determined, the pattern of the effect variation display is determined based on the information contained in the corresponding variation pattern command, and if both are negatively determined, the pattern has already been performed. It also sets the effect display at the time of switching (connecting the effect variable display) the effect variable display to the effect variable display set by the special first effect variable display setting process or the special second effect variable display setting process. configured as follows.

Next, the winning display processing performed in the display setting processing in step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 261 to announce the start of the jackpot state. If the determination in step S4701 is affirmative, in step S4702, the round grasping counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds, based on the jackpot type information included in the opening command, if "15RS", "15 ", and if "8RS" or "8RN", then "8" is set.

After that, in step S4703, after setting the opening effect (setting of the image of the decorative design display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, and the lighting mode of various lamps), this processing is finished. In this embodiment, when the value of the round comprehension counter is "15" or "8", the opening effect is performed for 8 seconds. The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table or the like that stores the correspondence between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various effects during the jackpot state. Choose and do it.

If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined in step S4704 whether or not a specific winning command has been received. If the determination in step S4704 is affirmative, that is, if a jackpot state occurs based on the ball entering the specific ball entering section 145, then in step S4702, the round grasp counter receives the jackpot type included in the specific winning command. Based on the information, "14" is set for "15RS", and "7" is set for "8RS" or "8RN".

After that, in step S4703, the opening effect is set, and then this processing ends. In this embodiment, when the value of the round comprehension counter is "14" or "7", the opening effect is performed for 2 seconds.

If a negative determination is made in step S4704, it is determined in step S4705 whether or not a round command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4705, in step S4706, after performing the setting of the effect during the round of 30 seconds at maximum, this processing is terminated.

If the determination in step S4705 is negative, it is determined in step S4707 whether or not an interval command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4707, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step S4708, and after setting the effect during the interval of 4 seconds in step S4709, this processing ends.

If the determination in step S4707 is negative, it is determined in step S4710 whether or not an ending command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4710, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step S4711, and after setting the ending effect for 10 seconds in step S4712, this process ends.

When a negative determination is made in step S4710, it is determined in step S4713 whether or not a jackpot end command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4713, in step S4714, the ending display is immediately terminated, and a jackpot display termination process is performed in which the mode of the normal game state in which variable display is performed is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, at this timing, either the time saving start command or the rush start command is received, so based on this command, the production stage corresponding to the time saving mode or the rush mode is derived. do. After step S4714, the process ends.

Moreover, when a negative determination is made in step S4713, it is determined in step S4715 whether or not a small hit start command has been received. When the determination in step S4715 is affirmative, in step S4716, the small winning effect setting for deriving the effect display during the small winning state is performed, and then this processing ends.

Moreover, when a negative determination is made in step S4715, it is determined in step S4717 whether or not a small hit end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4717, this processing ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S4717, in step S4718, the small winning effect display is immediately ended, and a small winning display ending process is performed in a mode of the normal game state in which variable display is performed. After step S4718, the process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 37, at step S3908, a variation stop process relating to stopping the variation display of the decorative design display device 42 is executed. Here, the fluctuation stop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 44 .

First, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 stop command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4401, it is determined in step S4402 whether or not the second effect variation display is being derived. If the determination in step S4402 is affirmative, in step S4403, a process of stopping and displaying the second effect variation display is performed. After step S4403, the process proceeds to step S4407, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4402, that is, the variable display of the second special display device 43b was performed, but the second effect variable display corresponding thereto was not performed in the decorative design display device 42. In the case (when the first effect variation display is performed), the process proceeds to step S4407, which will be described later.

Moreover, when negative determination is carried out by step S4401, it is determined whether the special figure 1 stop command was received in step S4404. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4404, it is determined in step S4405 whether or not the first effect variation display is being derived. When the determination in step S4405 is affirmative, in step S4406, processing for stopping the first effect variation display is performed. After step S4406, the process proceeds to step S4407. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4405, that is, the variable display of the first special display device 43a was performed, but the first effect variable display corresponding thereto was not performed in the decorative design display device 42. If so (if the second variable display is being performed), the process moves to step S4407.

In step S4407, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 forced stop command is received. When the affirmative determination is made in step S4407, that is, the first variable display is stopped and displayed in the mode of teaching the jackpot state in the first special display device 43a, and accordingly, the second special display device 43b which was in the process of variable display is displayed. When the second variable display is forcibly stop-displayed (forcibly terminated), in step S4408, a process of immediately ending the second effect variable display is performed.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4407, it is determined in step S4409 whether or not the special figure 1 forced stop command has been received. If the determination is affirmative in step S4409, that is, the second special display device 43b stops displaying the second variable display in a manner corresponding to the big hit or the small hit, and along with that, the first special When the first variable display of the display device 43a is forcibly stop-displayed (forcibly terminated), in step S4410, special figure 1 forced stop processing for immediately ending the first effect variable display is performed.

After steps S4408 and S4410, or if a negative determination is made in step S4409, it is determined in step S4411 whether or not a support termination command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4411, this processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S4411 is affirmative, that is, if the first variable display and the second variable display are performed a total of 70 times in the time saving mode and the rush mode, decorative pattern display in step S4412. A process for changing the performance stage displayed on the device 42 to a "normal stage" is performed. After that, this process is terminated.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since there is no possibility of winning a small winning state with respect to the first variation display, this processing may be terminated after step S4408.

Here, the flow of variable display in the first special display device 43a, the second special display device 43b, and the decorative pattern display device 42 as the game progresses will be described with reference to FIG.

First, as shown in FIG. 49(a), in the normal mode, the first variable display is set as the middle variable display, and the second variable display is set as the long variable display (200 minutes at the shortest in this embodiment). Therefore, substantially, the game is such that only the first variable display is performed sequentially. In the normal mode, in the decorative pattern display device 42, a display related to the first variable display (first effect variable display, etc.) is derived, and a display related to the second variable display is not derived, resulting in a first display state. .

Further, when the "8RS" jackpot is taught in the first variation display, the "8RS" jackpot state is performed, and after the jackpot state ends, the game shifts to the rush mode. In the rush mode, the first variable display is set as a long variable display (120 minutes at the shortest in this embodiment), and the second variable display is set as a short variable display, so substantially only the second variable display is performed. It becomes a game that digests sequentially.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second start winning device 33c (in a state where the second variable display is not suspended), it is configured to always win either a big win or a small win, In addition, when one of the first variable display and the second variable display is stopped to teach a big win or a small win, the other is forced to be stopped. Therefore, in the rush mode, when the second variation display does not teach the big win, the second variation display teaches the small win, and when the second variation display ends, the first variation display changes to " It is forcibly stopped and displayed (forcibly terminated) in a manner corresponding to "off", and a small win state is started.

After the end of the small hit state, the first variation display and the second variation display corresponding to the variation information stored in the first reservation area of the first special variation reservation area and the second special variation reservation area are started. It is designed to be In other words, the first variation display that is forcibly stopped when the small winning state occurs is erased. In addition, the game mode is not changed based on the occurrence of the small winning state. However, if the second fluctuation display that has become a small hit is the fluctuation display of the 70th rotation, which is the upper limit of the rush mode or the time saving mode, after the small hit state, it becomes the normal mode, and the first corresponding to the normal mode A variable display and a second variable display are performed.

Further, in the rush mode, the display related to the second variable display (second effect variable display, etc.) is derived in the decorative pattern display device, and a second display state is set in which the display related to the first variable display is not derived. .

Also, for example, in the small winning state that occurs in the rush mode, when the game ball enters the specific ball entering portion 145 of the second variable winning device 32b and the "8RN" big winning state occurs, after the big winning state ends, Switch to short-time mode. As shown in FIG. 49(b), in the time saving mode, the first variable display is set as the short variable display, and the second variable display is set as the long variable display, so substantially only the first variable display It becomes a game that digests sequentially.

In addition, in the time saving mode, the decorative pattern display device is in a first display state in which the display related to the first variable display is derived and the display related to the second variable display is not derived.

Then, when the occurrence of a jackpot (for example, "8RS") is taught in the first variation display, the second variation display is forced in a manner corresponding to "out" as the first variation display ends. A stop display (forced termination) is made, and a jackpot state is started.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 49(c), the second variation display is performed 70 times, which is the upper limit, without the occurrence of the big win state in the rush mode, and even in the small win state corresponding to the second change display, the big win is made. When the state does not occur, after the end of the small winning state, the mode is shifted to the normal mode. After the end of the small hit state, the variation pattern is set corresponding to the normal mode based on the variation information stored in the first special variation reservation area and the second reservation first area of the second special variation reservation area. The first variable display and the second variable display are started. That is, the first variable display is set as the middle variable display, and the second variable display is set as the long variable display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 50(d), the jackpot "8RS" is won in the win-or-fail lottery based on the ball entering the first normal starting prize winning device 33a or the first support starting prize winning device 33b in the normal mode. is won, the first variation display that teaches the result of the lottery is performed, the first variation display is stopped, and a jackpot state of "8RS" occurs ("8RS" in the first variation display If a jackpot state occurs), after the jackpot state ends, the rush mode is entered, but the second fluctuation display of the first rotation after the jackpot state ends corresponds to the small hit, and the first fluctuation display of the first rotation When the game corresponds to the big win, the first fluctuation display is also set as the short fluctuation display (see step S904 of the first fluctuation display setting process in FIG. 20).

Further, in the rush mode, the second display state is basically used, but when the first variation display for the big win is to be varied, the main controller 261 issues the first forcible teaching command together with the first variation pattern command. In order to receive it, affirmative determination is made in step S4509 of the variable display setting process of FIG. 43, and in step S4510, a special first effect variable display setting is performed for performing the first effect variable display corresponding to the first variable display that will be the big hit. process. However, the first effect variable display (special first effect variable display) conforms to the second variable effect display in the second variable state (rush mode), for example, the decorative pattern is displayed in the second variable effect display. When it is not used, a mode similar to the case of teaching a big hit by the second effect variable display is derived without using any decorative symbols for the special first effect variable display.

In addition, the special first effect variable display is always set to have a shorter (or the same) variable time than the second variable display performed at the same time. (For example, it is always set to 15 seconds, etc.).

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the second special display control process is performed before the first special display control process. When both the display and the second variation display of the first rotation correspond to the jackpot, the special figure 2 jackpot confirmation flag can be set to on before the special figure 1 jackpot confirmation flag is set to on. (See step S1702 in FIG. 23), it is possible to give priority to the jackpot of the second variation display.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 50(e), when the second variation display in the first rotation when the rush mode ends and the normal mode starts corresponds to a big win, the second variation display also shows a short variation. It is set as a display (see step S1706 of the second fluctuation display setting process in FIG. 23).

Further, in the normal mode, the display state is basically the first display state, but when the second variation display for the big win is to be varied and displayed, the main controller 261 issues the second forced teaching command together with the second variation pattern command. In order to receive it, affirmative determination is made in step S4504 of the variable display setting processing of FIG. process. However, the second effect variable display (special second effect variable display) has a mode conforming to the first effect variable display in the first variable state (normal mode), and uses decorative symbols to display the first effect variable. Similar aspects are derived when the display teaches a jackpot.

In addition, the special second effect variable display is always set to have a shorter (or the same) variable time than the first variable display that is performed at the same time, and the time during which the first variable display is not performed is (almost) (For example, it is always set to 15 seconds, etc.).

Further, although not shown, even when the second variation display in the first rotation after the end of the jackpot state of "8RN" is a jackpot, the second variation display is set as a short variation display, and a special second variation display is set. Effect variation display setting processing is performed.

In addition, for example, in the normal mode or the time saving mode, the second variation display (hereinafter referred to as the hit (referred to as the second variation display of ) is retained and stored, the second variation display for the winning will stop after 200 to 500 minutes of the second variation display during fluctuation if there is no winning in the first variation display. After being displayed, it is set as a short variation. In this case, when the winning second variable display is started, it is possible that the first variable display is being performed and the first effect variable display is being performed. Depending on the progress of the first variable effect display, if it is difficult to smoothly transition to the second variable effect display, an effect such as transitioning to the second variable effect display (for example, blacking out and then full rotation production, etc.) may be sandwiched.

Returning to the description of FIG. 37, in the lamp setting process of step S3909, the lighting pattern of lamps/electrical decorations is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative pattern display device 42. FIG.

In the sound setting process of step S3910, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in order to synchronize with the effect display performed by the decorative design display device 42. Also, when a command related to sound such as notification of error occurrence is transmitted from the main controller 261, settings for performing these controls are also performed in step S3910.

In step S3911, other processing such as control setting of customer waiting effect is performed. In other words, when the state in which the player is not playing continues for a specified period of time, it is configured to shift to the customer attracting mode or the energy saving mode, and the decorative design display device 42 does not display the decorative design as a customer waiting effect (alternative A series of moving images is displayed in the display, or a still image is displayed), and a demo screen display is derived in which the screen becomes darker. It should be noted that the demo screen display can be performed even during the variable display of the long variable display.

In step S3912, an external output process is executed to transmit control signals based on the settings in steps S3905 to S3912 to each device. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative design display device 42 displays the decorative design in a variable manner.

After the processing of steps S3905 to S3912, which is performed every 2 msec, is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3913 to determine whether the RAM 553 stores power-off occurrence information. determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261 .

If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step S3914 to determine whether or not the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 has been destroyed, the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3913 that information on occurrence of power failure is stored, power failure processing is executed in step S3915. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

As described in detail above, in the present embodiment, in a configuration in which the first variable display and the second variable display can be performed in parallel, the second variable time is considerably long (basically, only the first variable display is performed) and a second variation state in which the first variation time is considerably long (basically only the second variation display is performed). As a result, for example, in the first variation state for the purpose of causing the first start ball entry means to enter the game ball and execute the first variation display, the first variation time is the normal mode with the normal length. , a short time mode in which the first variation time is short and the first variation display can be progressed at a relatively high pitch can be set, and a game ball is entered into the second starting ball entry means to perform the second variation. In the second variation state for the purpose of executing the display, it is possible to set a rush mode in which the second variation time is short and the second variation display can proceed at a relatively high pitch. Therefore, it is possible to provide three game states (game modes) in which the game characteristics change without providing a configuration for changing the probability of winning the jackpot state in the first winning lottery (jackpot lottery), and as a result, It is possible to improve interest and the like.

Furthermore, in the time saving mode and the rush mode, by giving a privilege that can suppress ball loss (a high ball entering state in which the blade member 37 of the first support start winning device 33b is easily opened), the first right or wrong Even if the probability of winning the first special game state in the lottery is always constant, the time-saving mode and the rush mode are at least a better ball holding state than the normal mode, and the normal mode for the player. Two more advantageous game states can be set. Therefore, even if the rush mode is not provided after the end of the jackpot state, by providing the time-saving mode instead of the normal mode, the disappointment of the player is alleviated and the desire to play is improved. can be done.

Moreover, in the time-saving mode, the jackpot state cannot be generated unless the first winning lottery is basically won. A big winning state can also be generated when a game ball entering the second variable winning device 32b opened based on the winning win enters the specific ball entering section 145.例文帳に追加Furthermore, the ratio of winning the jackpot with respect to the second variation display to the jackpot with rush is higher than the case of winning the jackpot with respect to the first variation display. In this way, it is possible to provide a clear difference in terms of advantages for the player between the time-saving mode and the rush mode, thereby improving game performance and performance.

In this embodiment, the first normal start winning device 33a and the first support start winning device 33b perform the first variable display when a game ball enters, and the second variable display occurs when a game ball enters. is provided with a second starting winning device 33c.

The first support starting prize winning device 33b is provided with a blade member 37, and is in a closed state for regulating ball entry into the first support starting prize winning device 33b, and an open state for facilitating entry of a ball into the first support starting prize winning device 33b. It is configured so that the state can be changed between

Furthermore, the first support starting prize winning device 33b is provided in the lower part of the right side area in the game area, and if it is open, a game ball hit to the right can enter.

In addition, the second starting prize winning device 33c is also provided in the upper part of the right side area. Therefore, in the time saving mode, the game ball hit to the right with the aim of entering the first support start winning device 33b is configured to enter the second start winning device 33c, and in the rush mode. It is configured so that a game ball struck to the right with the aim of entering the second starting prize winning device 33c can also enter the first support starting prize winning device 33b.

That is, in the present embodiment, in both the time saving mode and the rush mode, it is configured to suppress ball loss by making it easier to enter the game ball into the first support start winning device 33b. . For this reason, for example, a blade member is provided not only in the first support start-up winning device 33b but also in the second start-up winning device 33c. Compared to the case where the second start winning device 33c is in a high winning state (so-called "electric chew" is configured to be two), simplification of control, cost reduction, etc. can be planned.

Furthermore, even if a game ball enters the first support start winning device 33b in the rush mode, or a game ball enters the second start winning device 33c in the time saving mode, as described above, in the rush mode Since the first variable time is long and the second variable time is set long in the time saving mode, the first variable display is rapidly digested in the rush mode, and the second variable display is rapidly digested in the short time mode. can be avoided.

In addition, for example, when the first support start-up winning device 33b is omitted and an opening and closing member is provided in the second variable winning device 32b, in the time saving mode, the game ball is entered into the first normal start-up winning device 33a. Since the game ball can enter the second starting prize winning device 33c which is in the open state, it is possible to perform the first variable display while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls. The ease with which a game ball enters the starting winning device 33a is the same as in the normal mode. In addition, if the opening/closing member 37 is omitted instead of omitting the first support starting prize winning device 33b, and the configuration is such that the game ball is always easy to enter, the first support starting prize winning device 33b is used even in the normal mode. Since it is more advantageous to aim, the meaning of the existence of the first normal start winning device 33a is lost, and the difference between the normal mode and the time saving mode is not so much.

In this respect, by providing the opening and closing member 37 in the first support start winning device 33b, it is easy for the game ball to enter the first support start winning device 33b in the time saving mode and the rush mode, and in the normal mode, the time saving mode and the rush mode. It is possible to add a configuration in which a game ball is difficult to enter the first support starting prize winning device 33b. Therefore, the difference between the time-saving mode and the normal mode can be made clear, and the game can be sharpened.

Further, since the first normal start winning device 33a and the first support start winning device 33b are provided as the first starting ball winning means for performing the first variable display, the first starting ball winning means is used. , a first support start winning device 33b for realizing a high ball entry state, and a first normal start prize winning device 33a for enabling execution of the first lottery in a low ball entry state, each of which is suitable can be installed in any position. That is, when a game ball is launched so as to enter the first normal start winning device 33a, the game ball is arranged so that there is no possibility of entering the second start winning device 33c, or the second start winning device The first support starting prize winning device 33b can be arranged at a position where the game ball that is hit can enter the device 33c more easily. Therefore, the necessary and convenient functions can be exhibited more reliably in each game mode, and the game can proceed more smoothly.

In addition, the second starting winning device 33c of the present embodiment can always enter a game ball, and the second starting winning device 33c makes it easier for a game ball to enter than the first normal starting winning device 33a. is configured as Therefore, the second variable display can proceed at a good tempo in the rush mode, and the exhilarating feeling in the rush mode can be made more reliable. In addition, regarding the second start winning device 33c, even if the configuration is such that the game ball is always easy to enter, the second variation time is longer in the time saving mode and the normal mode, so the second variation display is not performed in the time saving mode and the normal mode. You can avoid the situation of being digested more and more.

Furthermore, from the normal mode (first variation state) in which a game is played in which a game ball is entered into the first normal start winning device 33a and the first variation display is performed, a game ball is entered into the second start winning device 33c. When shifting to the rush mode (second variation state) in which the game is executed by causing the balls to execute the second variation display, the second start winning device 33c is provided with a blade member, and is in an open state only in the rush mode. Or, if it is configured that it is difficult to open in the normal mode or the time saving mode, the second variable display is not yet stored at the start of the rush mode, and only the first variable display is performed. It is feared that In other words, if it is more advantageous for the player to win the jackpot state in the second variation display than to win the big win state in the first variation display, there is a concern that the occurrence of such a situation will cause a decrease in interest. be. In this regard, in the configuration in which the second start-up prize-winning device 33c is always allowed to enter a ball, and the normal mode is shifted to the rush mode with the big win state in between, in the jackpot state, the second start-up prize-winning device 33c is not allowed to enter the ball. By adopting a configuration in which the game ball is required to be shot (in this example, hit to the right) in a desired area, the second variable display is retained and stored during the jackpot state, and the second variable display is displayed at the start of the rush mode. can be started directly. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the first variable display is performed and the second variable display is not performed even though the rush mode is started, and the game can be smoothly progressed.

In the present embodiment, the second starting prize winning device 33c, the through gate 34, the first support starting prize winning device 33b, and the first variable prize winning device 32a are placed in the right side region which is the region on the right side of the center frame 47 in the game region. , A second variable winning device 32b is provided, and in the time saving mode, the rush mode, the big win state, and the small win state, the game can be smoothly progressed if "right hitting" is done, In the normal mode, the game can be progressed by "left hitting". Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to understand the operation of hitting different game balls in each game state (game mode) and where the ball should be hit.

In addition, the first support start-up prize device 33b is arranged downstream of the second start-up prize device 33c in the right side area. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball entry into the second start-up winning device 33c is blocked by the first support start-up winning device 33b that is in the open state.

In addition, for example, when winning the jackpot state in the first lottery and shifting from the normal mode to the rush mode with the jackpot state in between, it is necessary to mainly sequentially execute the second variation display after the jackpot state. When the second variable display for which the variable time is set in the mode is taken over even after the end of the jackpot state (interrupted when the jackpot state occurs and resumed when the jackpot state ends), in the normal mode If the set second fluctuation time still remains long, the second fluctuation display does not end for a long time in the rush mode, and the game does not progress (in some cases, it may be reset by a hall official). need arises).

Furthermore, when shifting from the rush mode to the normal mode, the first fluctuation time set in the rush mode is taken over even if the mode shifts to the normal mode, so that the first fluctuation display does not end for a long time, and the game is continued. It is feared that it will not progress.

In this regard, as in the present embodiment, when it is taught that a big win state and a small win state occur in one of the first variation display and the second variation display, the other variation By forcibly stopping the display (forced termination) in a manner that teaches the disconnection, as described above, the variable time spans the state transition between the normal mode (and the time saving mode) and the rush mode By taking over, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the variable display is not finished and the game is delayed.

In addition, in the second winning lottery in the rush mode, the first variation display is displayed almost every time (when the first variation display wins the ), it is possible to forcibly end the display and set a new time for the next first variable display. For this reason, in the rush mode, even if the time for the first variable display is not set to be very long, if it is set to be slightly longer than the second variable display that starts (almost) at the same time, the second variable display will be displayed. As long as the variable display is being performed, the first variable display is not displayed normally (when the first variable time is completed). Therefore, it is possible to reliably avoid a situation in which the first variable display is stop-displayed in the rush mode against the player's intention.

In the present embodiment, an upper limit is set for the number of variable displays performed in the time saving mode and the rush mode, but the number of variations is counted when the variable display is stopped (not at the start of the variable display). Counter) is updated, and the variable display that is forcibly stopped is not counted. In other words, the variable display that is forcibly stop-displayed is stop-displayed in a mode corresponding to the loss regardless of the result of the corresponding win-fail lottery (the result of the win-fail lottery is not reflected, and is substantially erased). Therefore, it is not included in the variable display count. As a result, for example, in the rush mode, the first variable display is counted as a variable display (not only the second variable display, but also the first variable display consumes the remaining number of times). It is possible to avoid and perform the second variable display for the upper limit number of times with a higher probability (the first variable display is performed when the first variable display is a big win).

In addition, in this embodiment, in order to avoid that the jackpot state is redundantly derived in the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b When one of the special display devices 43b is performing a variable display indicating the occurrence of a big win state, the other is configured not to start a new variable display. Therefore, in the rush mode, when the first variation display for teaching the occurrence of the big win state is started, the second variation display cannot be performed, and the first variation time of the first variation display is long. If it is set as a variable display (120 minutes to 360 minutes), there is a concern that the game will not be able to progress.

In this regard, in the present embodiment, even in the rush mode, when the first variation display for teaching the occurrence of the jackpot state is started, it is recommended to set the first variation time of the first variation display longer. By avoiding (in this example, 15 seconds or 20 seconds), the first variation display can be ended relatively early, a big win state can be generated, and the above problem can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered, causing a decrease in interest and a sense of distrust, and at the same time, for example, when an error cancellation operation is required, the trouble of the person involved in the game hall increases. Such situations can be avoided.

Further, even in the normal mode or the time saving mode, when the second variation display for teaching the occurrence of the big winning state is started, setting the second variation time of the second variation display to be long is avoided. (In this example, it is set to 15 seconds or 20 seconds), so that the second variation display can be ended relatively early, and a big win state can be generated. Therefore, after the power is turned on, when the first second fluctuation display corresponds to the jackpot, or when the first second fluctuation display when shifting from the rush mode to the normal mode corresponds to the jackpot, or when the first second fluctuation display corresponds to the jackpot. When the first 2nd fluctuation display corresponds to the jackpot when the mode starts, the (2nd) 1st fluctuation display will not start forever (If you leave it alone, it will take about 3 hours at the fastest. ) can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered, causing a decrease in interest and a sense of distrust, and at the same time, for example, when an error cancellation operation is required, the trouble of the person involved in the game hall increases. Such situations can be avoided.

Also, when you end the game in normal mode, you can understand that the second fluctuation display is not in a jackpot state (if you ask a game hall staff, they will tell you that if it is a jackpot, it should be stopped. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of reluctance and discomfort to end the game while leaving the variable display, and to reduce the substantial loss.

In addition, the second variable display is performed in the normal mode, and detection of a game ball at a position that cannot enter the first normal start winning device 33a (entering the through gate 34, the second start winning device 33c, etc. (detection based on the above) is performed, guidance information that encourages the ball to enter the first normal start prize device 33a (prompts left-handed hitting) may be derived. In this case, even if the game ball enters the second starting prize winning device 33c, the game ball is shot aiming at the second starting prize winning device 33c in a state where the second variation display cannot be extinguished. It is possible to stop the useless action and prevent the loss of the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, the maximum number of pending memories for the second variable display is one. In other words, when the game ends, it is often in the normal mode, and even if the second variable display is suspended in the normal mode, it takes a considerably long time (minimum 3 hours) unless the game is shifted to the rush mode. It is necessary to wait a long time until the end of the second variation time set to . Therefore, even if the suspension of the second variable display remains, the game is ended with the suspension of the second variable display left as it is.

In this regard, according to the present embodiment, if the right-hand shot is stopped at the end of the rush mode, and the second start winning device 33c is not entered in the normal mode immediately after, the second start winning device 33c that has been suspended is started with the start of the normal mode. As soon as the variable display is started, the suspension of the second variable display disappears. Further, as described above, if the second variable display corresponds to the big win, the long variable display is not performed, and the display is stopped relatively early, so that the second variable display that will result in the big win is left. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game must be terminated. Therefore, when the game is ended in the normal mode, the second variable display, which is not the jackpot that is being executed, is left, and the player's mental image deteriorates when the game is ended. You can control the situation. Furthermore, after the player finishes playing, if another player starts playing and a jackpot state occurs in the normal mode relatively early, the player who was playing first will It is possible to prevent the user from having doubts about whether it is the variable display that he has put on hold or from causing trouble.

In addition, for example, in the normal mode, when the reserved storage of the second variation display is confirmed (so-called look-ahead) and the jackpot state is won, the second variation display corresponding to the jackpot state is displayed. It is also conceivable to set the second fluctuation time for all of the second fluctuation displays relatively short, but in this case, if the second fluctuation time is not set relatively short, the suspended second fluctuation display It is determined that the jackpot condition is not supported. For this reason, the larger the number of the second variable display that can be held, the more the second variable display for the reserved second variable display that is not surely won in the jackpot state is digested when the rush mode state is entered. It will be done. As a result, the player may be offended, so it is desirable that the suspension of the second variable display is as small as possible.

Further, with respect to the first variable display, by being able to hold and store four of them, it is possible to improve the game performance and performance in the normal mode and the time saving mode. In addition, by making it possible to hold even one of the second variable displays, the second variable display held and stored during the big win state is derived immediately after the big win state, etc., and the rush mode. can minimize the period in which the second variation display is not performed, and when both the first variation display and the second variation display correspond to the jackpot state in the second variation state immediately after the jackpot state. In addition, it is also possible to give priority to the second variable display.

Furthermore, when the second variable display is the long variable display, not one pattern but a plurality of patterns are prepared for the second variable time (200 minutes, 240 minutes, 360 minutes, 380 minutes, and 500 minutes). In this way, when the long pattern is selected, the length of the second variable display has a plurality of patterns, making it difficult to grasp when the second variable display of the long pattern will end. That is, for example, even if the second variable display of the long pattern is started, if the second variable display ends within the business hours of the game hall and the second variable display is performed, , In the case of a configuration that always occurs in either the first special game state or the second special game state, the second start winning device 33c is made to enter the game ball in the normal mode to start the second variable display. Then, if the player waits without shooting the game ball, and shoots the game ball so that the game ball can enter the second variable winning device 32b in accordance with the timing when the second variable display of the long pattern ends. , it is possible to effectively obtain an opportunity to generate a jackpot state without reducing the number of balls.

In this respect, as in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of patterns of the second variation time of the second variation display of the long pattern, so that the game ball is shot in accordance with the opening of the second variable winning device 32b as described above. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the player is efficiently targeted for the big winning state and the gap between the player and the player who does not engage in such action widens.

In addition, in the normal mode and the time saving mode, even if a small hit occurs, the opening time of the second variable winning device 32b is short, and the game ball that enters the second variable winning device 32b does not necessarily Since it is configured so that the ball does not enter the ball (it is possible even if the ball does not enter), the above concern can be further suppressed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 is configured to be able to derive the first variable effect display and the second variable effect display corresponding to the first variable display and the second variable display. When both of the two variable displays are performed, the effect corresponding display corresponding to the variable display that is stopped and displayed first is derived. Therefore, by performing the effect variable display, which is a display for effect corresponding to the variable display, it is possible to improve the performance. Also, the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b can be directly visually recognized, and the decorative pattern display device 42 can display the effect variable display corresponding to the first variable display and the second variable display, respectively. are derived at the same time, there is a concern that the display may become cluttered, and it may not be possible to know which one will be stopped and displayed first, resulting in a lack of excitement. In this regard, in the present embodiment, basically, the effect variable display is performed corresponding to the variable display whose result is taught first, out of the first variable display and the second variable display. By visually recognizing the decorative pattern display device 42, the player can certainly enjoy the effect of teaching the result of the lottery corresponding to the first variable display and the second variable display.

Further, when the second variable display corresponding to the big win is performed in the time saving mode or the normal mode, the second variable display corresponding to the big win is derived, and when the first variable display corresponding to the big win is performed in the rush mode, the second variable display is derived. A one-correspondence variation representation is derived. Therefore, if the decorative pattern display device 42 is visually recognized, it is possible to more reliably obtain the action and effect that the trend of the game can be comprehended.

In addition, even in a state where only the second variation display of the small hit is performed in the time saving mode or the normal mode, the decorative symbol display device 42 does not derive the second effect variation display, and the second effect variation display is not performed in the rush mode. Even when only the first variable display is performed, the decorative symbol display device 42 does not derive the first effect variable display. For this reason, the performance variation display corresponding to the never-ending variation display is performed in the decorative pattern display device 42, and new entry of game balls to the start winning devices 33a, 33b, and 33c is refrained. Alternatively, by continuing to perform the second effect variation display in the normal mode, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is difficult to leave the seat.

In the above-described embodiment, when both the first variation display and the second variation display for the first time after the end of the big win correspond to the big win, the second variation display is performed so that the big win state related to the second variation display occurs. It's becoming For this reason, the second variable display that is likely to win the advantageous jackpot type (jackpot with rush) is prioritized, and the situation that the second variable display is erased can be avoided.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

(a; win-fail lottery for the first variable display) In the above-described embodiment, there are cases where a small win is won in the win-fail lottery for the first variable display (the first normal start-up prize device 33a and the first support start-up prize device 33b). A first winning lottery and a second winning lottery may be performed based on the ball entering the ball. Furthermore, a configuration for winning a small win in a lottery for the first variable display, and a configuration for forcibly terminating the other variable display when a big win or a small win occurs in one of the first and second variable displays is used. Therefore, an effect (rush chance effect) as exemplified below may be performed. Incidentally, as in the above-described embodiment, during the execution of the second variable display, in the big win state and the small win state, when the second start winning switch 224c is detected, the second start winning switch 224c corresponding to the detection The variable display is retained and stored up to one time.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), when winning of a small win is taught in the first variable display in the normal mode, the second variable display, which is a long variable display, is forcibly terminated and a small win state is generated. However, in the small winning state corresponding to the first variable display, the opening time of the second variable winning device 32b is shorter than that in the small winning state corresponding to the second variable display, and the second variable winning device 32b is substantially opened. cannot be expected to enter the ball. In addition, even if the game ball enters the second variable winning device 32b in the small winning state corresponding to the first variable display, there is no possibility that it will be guided to the specific ball entering unit 145 (the second variable winning device The timing at which the game ball entering 32b reaches the slide bar 149a of the distribution device 149 does not match the timing at which the slide bar 149a is opened.

After the end of the small win state corresponding to the first variable display, the first variable display and the second variable display are set, and the first variable display and the second variable display are started. The small winning state corresponding to the 1 fluctuation display is a small winning with a scenario such that after the small winning state, the second fluctuation display is set only once so that the second fluctuation time is not prolonged (so that it does not become a long fluctuation display). state. In other words, although the game is in the normal mode even after the small win state corresponding to the first variation display, the second short variation time determination table is referred to when setting the second variation time. As a result, although it is in the normal mode, the second variable display can be stopped and displayed to generate a small win state corresponding to the second variable display, and in the small win state, the second variable prize winning device 32b is sufficient. Since the ball can be expected to enter the specific ball entering section 145, a game ball can be entered into the second variable winning device 32b which is in the open state, and a game can be performed aiming for the ball entering the specific ball entering section 145. That is, while the probability of a big win in the first lottery is 1/240, the probability of a big win when a game ball is entered into the second variable winning device 32b is 1/40, and a big win state occurs. In this case, since there is a high ratio of being distributed to a big win with a rush, a state advantageous to the player (rush chance presentation) is provided.

FIG. 51(a) shows a case where the rush chance effect fails. In the small win state (rush chance) corresponding to the second variable display after the small win state with the scenario, the game ball is placed in the second variable winning device. 32b can not be made to enter the specific ball entry portion 145, and after the end of the small winning state, the first variation display is set as the middle variation display, and the second variation display is set as the long variation display as processing in the normal normal mode. (If it corresponds to a big hit, it is set as a short fluctuation display), and the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display are started.

On the other hand, FIG. 51(b) shows a case where the rush chance effect is successful, and in the small win state (rush chance) corresponding to the second variation display after the small win state with the scenario, the game ball enters the specific ball. If the ball enters the section 145, a jackpot state (for example, "8RS" jackpot) occurs. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a jackpot with a rush, the rush mode is started after the jackpot state ends.

Also, in the normal mode, "left hitting" is performed, and in the rush chance production, it is necessary to have the second start winning device 33c and the second variable winning device 32b perform "right hitting" in order to enter the game ball. Therefore, such guidance is provided by the decorative design display device 42 or the like. That is, as shown in FIG. 51(a), when the first variable display for teaching a small prize with a scenario is being performed, the decorative symbol display device 42 starts the rush chance effect during the first variable display. to derive a right-handed guidance display for prompting right-handed players. The right-handed guidance display is until the end of the small hit state with the scenario corresponding to the first fluctuation display (when the right-handed hit is performed according to the right-handed guidance display, the second start is usually before the small hit with the scenario ends). A game ball enters the winning device 33c, but if it does not enter until the end of the scenario small winning, the process is performed until the game ball enters the second variable winning device 32b.

Then, after the end of the small winning state with the scenario, when the second variable display of the rush chance effect set as the short variable display for one rotation only is started based on the entry of the ball into the second starting prize winning device 33c, In the decorative pattern display device 42, "Aim for the second attacker display" is derived to prompt the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32b. "Aim for the second attacker display" continues until the small hit state as a rush chance generated by the stop display of the second fluctuation display of the rush chance effect teaching a small win ends, or until the rush chance is performed until the game ball enters the specific ball entering portion 145 in the above.

When the game ball does not enter the specific ball entry part 145 in the small winning state as a rush chance and the small winning state ends, the first variable display and the second variable display are set and started, In the decorative pattern display device 42, a disappointing display to the effect that the rush chance has failed and a guidance display to the effect that the player wants to return to left-handed shooting are displayed. If it is not cured, the guidance display will be left).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 51(b), when the game ball enters the specific ball entering portion 145 in the small winning state as a rush chance, the big winning state is started (the big winning type is the second start winning device 33c (determined at the time of winning a prize), a success display indicating that the rush chance was successful is performed, and after a predetermined time, the success display is switched to a performance display during the big win state (big win display).

As described above, in this aspect example, when a small winning state occurs based on the winning lottery for the first variation display in the normal mode, the second variation time of the second variation display after the small winning state is Although it is in the first fluctuation state, it is set to be particularly short. That is, if the second variation time is short as in the rush mode, a small winning state is generated to enter the game ball into the second variable winning device 32b, and the big winning state based on the entering ball into the specific ball entering section 145. have the opportunity to generate Therefore, it is possible to add a game feature such as a rush mode game even though the game is in the normal mode. Therefore, it is possible to accentuate the game in the normal mode, to diversify the presentation, and to suppress monotony. As a result, it is possible to improve interest and the like.

In the above embodiment, the lottery for the second variable display is configured so that either the big win or the small win is always won.

(B; Avoiding long fluctuations in special situations) In the above embodiment, in the normal mode (first fluctuation state, normal game state) and the time saving mode (first fluctuation state, first support state), the jackpot (first When the second variable display corresponding to the special game state) is started, instead of setting the long variable as the second variable display, the second variable time determination table for winning the special condition is referred to, Short variation (middle variation is also possible) is set, and in rush mode (second variation state, second support state), first variation display corresponding to big win (first special game state) is started. In this case, instead of setting the long fluctuation as the first fluctuation display, the first fluctuation time determination table for special condition winning is referred to, and the short fluctuation (middle fluctuation is also possible) is set. Although it is configured, it may be configured so as not to perform the control to forcibly set the variable display so that it does not become long. However, if one of the first variable display and the second variable display is performing a variable display corresponding to a big win, the other variable display is prohibited. If such control is not performed, the game will be delayed (no matter how long the variable display lasts (200 minutes or more in the above example)), if the above control is not performed, the pachinko machine It is necessary to perform an operation to reset such a state of 10 (for example, to operate the ram erase switch 323), and to notify that it is in such a state (in normal mode and time saving mode, the second fluctuation display is a big hit or when it is detected that the first variable display has become a big hit in the rush mode, or the first variable display is not started in the normal mode and the time saving mode even though there is a hold, or the rush When it is detected that the second variable display is not started even though there is a hold in the mode, a corresponding signal is output to external devices such as hall computers, data lamps, and island equipment via the external terminal board 240. It is desirable to have a configuration such as turning on a lamp that indicates an error in the pachinko machine 10, etc.). In this case, it is possible to have the people involved in the game hall take prompt action.

(c; Concerning the configuration in which the jackpot fluctuation is not set to the long fluctuation) Also, in the above embodiment, "Even in the normal mode, when the second fluctuation display corresponding to the jackpot is started, the second fluctuation display is short. For example, in the normal mode, in a situation where the second variable display is not performed, the decorative design display device 42 or the like instructs "right hitting" (decorative design display In the device 42, guide that only one game ball is to enter the second starting prize winning device 33c), stop "right hitting" when the game ball enters the second starting prize winning device 33c ("left hitting") In addition to performing guidance, a second effect variable display is performed using, for example, a decorative pattern corresponding to the second variable display of the second special display device 43b (temporary second display state), and a big hit In the case of winning (in the case of short fluctuation), the second fluctuation display is stopped and the performance fluctuation display is stopped, and in the case of other than the big win (in the case of long fluctuation), the second fluctuation display is not stopped. , the second effect variable display is stopped at an appropriate point in a manner indicating a failure (although the stop display timing does not match the second variable display, the normal decorative pattern variable display is performed). can be configured to In other words, when the jackpot is won in the second variation display, the player who is provided with the rush mode is likely to select an advantageous jackpot type. When the display is started, the short variation is set as the second variation display. A player who knows the configuration and attempts to start the second variation display in the normal mode, and a player who does not know the configuration. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of unfairness between Also, with this configuration, it is possible to enhance performance and playability.

In addition, even if it is a big hit variation, it may be configured to be set as a long variation display according to the game mode. In addition, when the second variable display performed in the normal mode or the time saving mode corresponds to the jackpot state, the type of the jackpot state is selected with a relatively short total opening time of the first variable winning device 32a. It is also possible to

(d; configuration related to stop/start of variable display)
(d-1; Interruption of fluctuation display) In the above embodiment, when the second fluctuation display teaching a big win or a small win is stopped and displayed, the first fluctuation display is forced in a manner corresponding to "loss". When the first variable display for teaching a big win is stopped and displayed (forcibly terminated), the second variable display is forcibly stopped (forced terminated) in a manner corresponding to "loss". However, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, when one of the first variation display and the second variation display performs a stop display that teaches a big win, the other is forcibly terminated, and when one performs a stop display that teaches a small win, the other It may be configured to be interrupted (restarted after the winning state ends).

Furthermore, for example, when one of the first variation display and the second variation display performs a stop display that teaches a big win or a small win, the other is interrupted (resumes after the winning state ends). You may

Also, the other variable display that has been interrupted may be executed from the beginning after the win state ends. In this case, instead of forcibly stopping (forcibly ending) the variable display, a method of interrupting (not erasing the variable display) is adopted, but the interrupted variable display is performed halfway. situation can be avoided. That is, the interrupted variable display is restarted from the beginning after the end of the winning state. For example, the variable display ends immediately after the variable display is resumed with, for example, one second remaining, and the player cannot grasp what has happened. It is possible to avoid situations such as confusion. Furthermore, there is a resistance to game characteristics such as the disappearance of the variable display, such as when one of the first variable display and the second variable display is forcibly terminated along with the stop display that teaches the winning state of the other. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the player has a feeling of disgust or suspicion. In addition, if there is an interrupted variation display, after the winning state ends, the variation pattern is renewed again based on the variation information stored in the execution area of the special variation holding area corresponding to the interrupted variation display. It is also possible to store the variation pattern of the variation display that has been set and executed or interrupted, and to execute the variation display of the same variation pattern based on the stored information.

However, when adopting a configuration that does not forcibly terminate the first variable display with a small hit of the second variable display, the upper limit of the rush mode is reached and when shifting to the normal mode, the first variable display performing long fluctuation Therefore, the variation pattern is set again according to the current game mode based on the variation information stored in the execution area of the variation storage area corresponding to the interrupted variation display. , is desirably derived from the set variation pattern. In this case, when the second variation display is stopped in a mode of teaching the occurrence of a small winning state (second special game state) or a big winning state (first special game state), the interrupted second The variation pattern of the first variation display is set again, and in the win-or-fail lottery for the second variation display, either the small win or the big win is always won, so even if the rush mode shifts to the normal mode, it is already possible. To avoid a situation in which the first variation time (remaining time) of the executed first variation display is long and does not end for a while (the first variation time is so long that it has to be reset by a person involved in the game hall). can do.

Furthermore, for example, even if the state regarding the setting of the variable display is changed between the game mode before the jackpot state and the game mode after the jackpot state (for example, the variable time determination table to be referred to is changed), By continuing the variable display before the big win state as it is after the big win state, it is possible to avoid a situation in which there is no match. For example, if the state before the jackpot state is the rush mode, and the time saving mode is provided after the jackpot state, the first fluctuation time is lengthened unless the fluctuation time of the interrupted first fluctuation display is set short again. , an error state can be avoided.

Therefore, it is possible to avoid an error state when switching from the rush mode to the normal mode. It is possible to avoid situations such as being erased, etc., and bothering the people involved in the game hall. Therefore, even if the rush mode has an upper limit, it is possible to switch from the rush mode to the normal mode, and the degree of freedom in the design of the rush mode is improved (for example, before the rush mode ends, it is almost a big hit state ( (including those that pass through the small winning state), and when the game mode is changed, it is not necessary to have a configuration in which the big winning state is sandwiched.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when both the first variation display and the second variation display after the end of the big win correspond to the big win, the second variation display is performed and the big win state related to the second variation display occurs. However, it may be configured such that the first variable display is performed and a jackpot state related to the first variable display occurs.

(d-2; Alleviation of conditions for starting variable display) In the above embodiment, when one of the first variable display and the second variable display performs a variable display corresponding to a big win, the other variable display is newly performed. However, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, the winning state of the big win and the winning of the small win state are separately performed (a large winning random number counter used for the big winning lottery, a big winning judgment table, and a small winning random number used for the small winning lottery). A counter and a small win success/failure determination table are prepared so that a small win lottery will be held when the big win lottery is not won), and a first variable display for teaching a big win on the first special display device 43a. is being performed, the second variation display in which the big winning lottery is performed cannot be started, but the second variation display in which the small winning lottery is performed without the big winning lottery can be started. It may be configured as In this case, for example, as a configuration in which the first variation time is not set so long in the rush mode, during the first variation display that teaches the big win, a small win is generated by the second variation display, and the second variable winning device 32b is operated. A game ball is entered into the specific ball entry part 145 to generate a jackpot state, thereby forcibly ending the first variable display during the variable display and adding game characteristics such as avoiding the jackpot in the first variable display. is also possible. For example, when the first variable display during variable display in the rush mode corresponds to the jackpot state with time saving, based on the information, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays "Emergency occurrence, within 5 minutes (first (Until the stop of the variable display), a mission display such as "Open the second attacker and win V" may be displayed. However, in order not to cause any disadvantage to the player by performing the mission, all the jackpots related to the second fluctuation display are jackpots with rushes, or the mission is performed only when the first fluctuation display during the fluctuation display is a jackpot with time reduction. Further, for example, when the first variable display in the variable display is a jackpot with a rush, a display suggesting that fact is made to suggest that it is more profitable to stop shooting the game balls. It may be configured to

(e; Starting winning device) In the above embodiment, the first normal starting winning device 33a (first normal starting ball entry means) without the blade member 37 and the first support starting winning device 33b provided with the blade member 37 ( Although the first support starting ball entry means) and the second starting winning device 33c without the blade member 37 are provided, the configuration is not particularly limited to this. For example, a second start-up winning device 33c provided with a blade member 37 is provided for the lower position of the first normal start-up winning device 33a (first support start-up winning device 33b is omitted), time saving mode (first support state) Then, in the rush mode (second support state), the second starting prize winning device 33c may be easily opened (cannot be entered in the normal game state). Even in this case, the normal mode, which is a low ball entry state and the first fluctuation state (the second fluctuation display is a long fluctuation), and the high ball entry state (however, the second start winning device 33c wins the ball Although it suppresses the decrease, it does not make it easier to enter the first normal start winning device 33a), and the time saving mode that is the first variation state, the high ball state, and the rush that is the second variation state It is possible to change the state between modes. However, in this case, the tempo of the time saving mode becomes worse (even though the first variable time is shortened, the first variable display is not easily suspended, so the period in which the variable display is not performed increases). As in the above embodiment, it is desirable to have a configuration that does not worsen the tempo of the time saving mode.

In the rush mode, small hits are likely to occur, therefore, game balls enter the second variable prize winning device 32b relatively frequently, and corresponding prize balls can be expected, resulting in a high ball entry state (ball holding). or a state in which the number of game balls to be held increases). When adopting this configuration, it is possible to enter the ball with the left hand, but it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball with the right hand. It may be provided so as to allow a ball to be entered (the first normal start winning device 33a is omitted).

It should be noted that "a ball entry opening into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and a first start ball entry opening as a first start ball entry means into which a game ball that has entered the ball entry opening can enter. , and a second start ball entrance as a second start ball entrance means, a first start winning switch as a first start ball entrance detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first start ball entrance, and , a second start winning switch as a second start ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball entering the second start ball entry opening; and a specific starting winning device having a sorting device that alternately guides players to the second starting ball opening. In this case, both the first and second variable displays can be variably displayed in parallel, and the act of avoiding only the first variable display while playing a game can be more reliably prevented. In addition, an opening and closing member may be provided corresponding to the ball entry opening (in the closed state, the ball cannot be entered into the ball entry opening, and the first normal start winning device 33a is separately provided), or the first start Corresponding to the ball entrance or the second start ball entrance, a bypass opening is provided to allow the ball to enter without going through the ball entrance opening, and an opening/closing member is provided to open and close the bypass opening. The game ball may be guided to the bypass passage by the open/close member in the state (the first normal start winning device 33a is unnecessary).

In the above-described embodiment, by opening the blade member 37 of the first support start-up winning device 33b, not only is the game ball allowed to enter the first support start-up winning device 33b, but also the second start-up winning device 33c It may be configured to make it easier for a game ball to enter. For example, the first support start-up winning device 33b and the second start-up winning device 33c are arranged on the left and right, and at least one of the pair of blade members 37 of the first support start-up winning device 33b is on the side of the second start-up winning device 33c. , In the open position, the upper surface side is configured to have a V shape, and the game ball that has moved to the blade member 37 in the open position is caused by each inclined surface of the blade member 37, The first support start It may be configured to be guided to the prize winning device 33b or the second starting prize winning device 33c. Further, for example, when the second start-up winning device 33c is arranged below the first support start-up winning device 33b and the blade member 37 of the first support start-up winning device 33b is in the closed position, the blade member 37 is placed in the first position. Projecting downward from the starting port of the 1 support starting winning device 33b, the passage of the game ball to the second starting winning device 33c is (slightly) obstructed by the blade member 37, and the blade member 37 is in the open position It may be configured to eliminate it. When adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning device 33c in the case of the high ball entry state than in the low ball entry state. It is possible to make it difficult for a game ball to enter the 2-start winning device 33c.

In the above-described embodiment, the second starting winning device 33c is provided with a game nail that guides the game ball toward the starting opening of the second starting winning device 33c. However, for example, instead of using a game nail to make it easier to enter a game ball, other accessories arranged in the game area make it easier to make a game ball enter. Alternatively, the second start winning device 33c itself is configured to make it easier to enter the game ball (the start opening is wider than the first normal start winning device 33a, and the game ball is placed adjacent to the start opening on the start opening side It may be configured to include a guide plate that guides to the

Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, in the normal mode, if the game ball is fired so as not to enter the first normal start winning device 33a (for example, if you are hitting right and 2 When the start winning switch 224c or the through gate switch 225 is detected), the target location of the game ball so that the game ball can enter the first normal start winning device 33a is taught (left-handed) guidance), and also instruct the first normal start winning device 33a, which is the destination. In addition, in the time saving mode, rush mode, jackpot state, and small win state, the first support start winning device 33b, the second start winning device 33c, the first variable winning device 32a, the second variable winning device 32b, and the through When the game ball is shot so as not to enter the gate 34 (for example, when the first normal start winning switch 224a is detected), it is desirable to guide the player to hit to the right.

(f; variable prize winning device) In the above embodiment, the first variable prize winning device 32a provided at the lower right position of the first normal starting prize winning device 33a and the second variable prize winning device provided at the lower right portion of the center frame 47. 32b, but the structure, arrangement, number, etc. of the variable winning device are not particularly limited, and can be changed as appropriate for each model of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. For example, a second variable prize winning device 32b is provided at a position spaced right from the center frame 47, and a large prize winning opening penetrating the game board 30 in the front-rear direction, and a large winning opening provided in front of the large winning opening. A receiving portion with a substantially L-shaped cross section that guides the game ball that has moved forward to the big winning opening, and an open position that is provided inside the receiving portion and allows the game ball to move to the specific ball entering portion 145 side , and a distributing member that displaces to a closed position that does not allow it, and ) is provided above the receiving part and is configured to be slidable back and forth so as to appear in and out of the game area. shutter.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, by opening the opening and closing member 143 of the second variable winning device 32b to the open position, not only is the entry of the game ball into the second variable winning device 32b allowed, but also the second starting It may be configured so that game balls can easily enter the winning device 33c.

(g; Suspended storage) In the above embodiment, four first variable displays can be suspended and stored, and one second variable display can be suspended. The number of variable displays is not particularly limited. For example, the second variable display may be configured to be non-reservable, or two or more variable displays may be configured to be reservable. However, as in the above embodiment, if the second variable time is set to be considerably long in the normal mode or the time saving mode, there is a possibility that the game will end while the second variable display that is retained and stored remains. expensive. Therefore, by reducing the number of second variable displays that can be reserved, it is possible to reduce the number of second variable displays that remain after the end of the game, and play the game with the feeling that the player cannot enjoy the rights that should be received. or wait until the second variable display ends without firing the game ball, or the possibility of a jackpot state occurring even though no one is playing. can be suppressed.

In particular, in the above-described embodiment, when the second variation display in the first rotation after shifting from the rush mode to the normal mode corresponds to the big win, the second variation display is made the short variation display, and the corresponding big win state is generated. can be made Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the situation in which the game is terminated with the second variable display remaining, such that a big win may occur if the player does not hit right when the rush mode ends. It should be noted that the explanation that the second variable display, which is variablely displayed in the normal mode, does not correspond to the big win (if it corresponds to the big win, it will be stopped and displayed relatively early) is explained in the inner frame 12 or the It may be written on the front frame 14 or the like, or may be configured to be visible on the menu screen of the pachinko machine 10 .

Further, for example, as in the above embodiment, when the second variation display is stopped and displayed in a manner that teaches a big win or a small win, the first variation display is erased, the first variation display and the second variation If the maximum number of display suspensions is set to be the same (or the second variation display is larger), the steering wheel can be operated from the state in which the maximum numbers of the first variation display and the second variation display are respectively suspended and stored in the rush mode. If the jackpot is not included in the suspended first and second variable displays, the suspension of the first variable display will also be suspended at the time when the second variable display is fully suspended. all digested. As a result, the first variable display can be erased without consuming the suspended first variable display.

Additionally, it is possible to configure the first and second variable displays to be non-reservable. However, by configuring the variable display so that it can be retained and stored, the time period in which the variable display is not performed is shortened, and although the game ball entered the start winning device 33a, 33b, 33c, the corresponding first variable It is possible to reduce the situation in which the rights of the first variable display and the second variable display were not obtained because the display was being performed or the second variable display was being performed. Even if the second variable display is not retained and stored, the first variable display is set to the long variable display in the rush mode. It is possible to prevent a situation in which 1-variation display is performed and the distribution ratio of the jackpot type to be distributed when the jackpot state is won is disadvantageous.

(h; variation time) The setting of the first variation time and the second variation time is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. However, in order to make it difficult to specify the end timing of the long variation display, it is desirable to configure so that there are a plurality of variations time patterns of the long variation display.

Furthermore, in the case of the concept of executing only the variable display basically corresponding to the game mode among the first variable display and the second variable display, the second variable time in the normal mode and the time saving mode, and the first variable in the rush mode It is desirable that the time is as long as possible. For example, it is desirable that it is longer than the average time it takes to win a jackpot by playing a normal game, and is longer than the business hours of the game hall (for example, 24 hours a day). time, etc.). In this case, after the second variable display is started in the normal mode or the time saving mode, it is avoided that the game is played such as waiting without firing the game balls until the second stop display is stopped. be able to. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a big win occurs while no one is playing a game.

In addition, the display timer for measuring the fluctuation time is reset when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and on so that the fluctuation display set to the long fluctuation does not remain in the operation of the game hall the next day (remaining 0) ), or by turning off/on the power while operating the ram erase switch 323 of the pachinko machine 10, the pending memory of the variable display may be erased.

Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, even in the normal game state, if the number of first variable displays retained and stored is a predetermined plurality or more (for example, three or more or four), the second It may be configured such that one variation time is shortened and set (the first short variation time determination table is referred to).

Also, a special normal mode may be provided in which the first variation display is set as the long variation display, the second variation display is set as the middle variation display, and a low ball entry state is set. Furthermore, the first variation display is set as the middle variation display or the short variation display, and the second variation display is set as the middle variation display or the short variation display. A complete rush mode may be provided.

(i; example of embodiment with rush level) In the rush mode, a plurality of levels (rush levels) having different advantages for the player may be provided. An example mode will be described below with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. FIG. In addition, in this aspect example, when the stop display is performed in the mode of teaching a big win or a small win in one of the first variable display and the second variable display, the other variable display is interrupted and the big win state or the small win state is displayed. After the end of the winning state, the other interrupted variable display is resumed from the continuation (from the time of the remaining variable time).

As shown in FIG. 52(a), the jackpot probability in the first win/fail lottery of this embodiment is 1/80 regardless of whether the first win/fail lottery is related to the first variable display or the second variable display. . Also, the probability that the game ball entering the second variable prize winning device 32b enters the specific ball entering section 145 is about 1/30. Second win/fail lottery (in this example, a win/fail random number counter and a win/fail determination table are provided in addition to the win/fail random number counter and win/fail determination table used in the first win/fail lottery. ) is 1/240 for the first variation display and 1/1 for the second variation display.

In addition, the type of jackpot when a jackpot is won in relation to the first variation display is "8RS" at 30%, and a jackpot with 4 round time reduction (hereinafter referred to as "4RN") at 30%. As the time-saving mode that shifts after the "4RN" jackpot state, three types are prepared, with the upper limit number of fluctuation display being 20 times, 40 times, and 70 times (Fig. 52 (c) reference).

In addition, the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot in relation to the second variation display is "15RS" at 5%, "8RS" at 65%, and a jackpot with a two-round rush (hereinafter referred to as "2RS" at 30%). ). That is, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is made in relation to the second variable display (the first winning lottery based on the ball entering the second start winning device 33c wins the big win, or the second variable When a game ball entering the prize winning device 32b enters the specific ball entering section 145), a big hit with a rush is guaranteed.

The "2RS" big win state ends when the second variable winning device 32b performs the same operation as the small win state (opening for 1.6 seconds and opening for 0.1 seconds are performed). As a result, it is difficult to distinguish between the "2RS" and the "small win" (this can be grasped by visually recognizing the second special display device 43b). Furthermore, the mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 is made the same between the big win state and the small win state of the 2RS, and the count display in the rush mode is not reset in the 2RS (the data installed above the pachinko machine 10). By not outputting a jackpot signal to the counter as well), it is possible to make it appear that the fluctuation display has reached the upper limit in the rush mode and continue (if 2RS is won on the way).

Now, as shown in FIG. 53(a), in this embodiment, the first rush fluctuation time as the high state first fluctuation time determination table referred to when setting the first fluctuation time in the rush mode as the high state The determination table is provided with patterns corresponding tables for winning and winning (big wins, small wins), and furthermore, for losses, a "medium short table" and a "medium long table" are provided as level corresponding tables. is provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 53(b), the second rush fluctuation time determination table as the high state second fluctuation time determination table referred to when setting the second fluctuation time in the rush mode includes a pattern correspondence table For small wins, for big wins, and for support last, which is referred to when setting the final second fluctuation display that is the upper limit of rush mode, are provided, and for small wins, as a level correspondence table A "short table" and a "very short table" are provided.

Further, in this aspect example, by changing the combination of the first rush variation time determination table and the second rush variation time determination table that are referred to when setting the first variation display and the second variation display in the rush mode, Rush levels with different advantages for the player are set for the rush mode. In this embodiment, there are four rush levels, the medium long table is referred to in the setting of the first variation time, and the very short table is referred to in the setting of the second variation time. "Rush level 3", where the medium long table is referenced in the time setting, and the short table is referenced in the setting of the second fluctuation time, and the medium short table is referenced in the setting of the first fluctuation time, and the second fluctuation time is set. "Rush level 2" in which the very short table is referred to, and "Rush level 1" in which the medium short is referred to by setting the first variable time and the short table is referred to by setting the second variable time. ing.

In other words, if a jackpot is won in relation to the second variable display, it will always be a jackpot with a rush, but if a jackpot is won in relation to the first variable display, there is a possibility of a time-saving jackpot ( high), it is desirable to perform the second variable display as much as possible and not to perform the first variable display in the rush mode. For this reason, the rush level 4, in which the second variation time is likely to be set relatively short and the first variation time is likely to be set relatively long, is advantageous for the player, and the second variation time is likely to be set relatively long, and the second variation time is likely to be set relatively long. Rush level 1, which is likely to be set for a relatively short one fluctuation time, is disadvantageous to the player.

In this aspect example, the process for determining the rush level (level determination process) is, for example, the corresponding random value (value of the rush level random number counter) obtained in the start winning process, and the corresponding reservation area of the special variable reservation area stored in the rush information storage area. The memory in the rush information storage area is also shifted to the execution area side together with other variation information in the shift processing. When it is determined that the rush mode is applied at the end of the jackpot state, and when it is determined that the normal mode or the time saving mode was used before the jackpot state, the rush information storage area of the execution area corresponding to the jackpot state is stored. Based on the value of the stored rush level random number counter, the corresponding table (rush level determination table) is referenced to determine the rush level and store it in a rush level storage area provided separately from the special change reservation area. do. When setting the fluctuation times of the first and second fluctuation displays in the rush mode, a first rush fluctuation time determination table and a second rush fluctuation time determination table corresponding to the rush levels stored in the rush level storage area are used. Refer to it and determine the fluctuation time. Also, when winning a jackpot with a rush in the rush mode, the rush level does not change. In other words, once the rush level is determined, it is maintained at the same rush level until the mode shifts to the normal mode, even if a big win state or a small win state is interposed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 as the effect display means may derive a level suggestive effect for suggesting/teaching the rush level. For example, at the start of the rush mode, a title display indicating the start of the rush mode is derived, and along with the display, for example, the color of the title display may be changed to perform a level suggestion effect. (It may be performed only when the production button 125 is operated). Further, during the fluctuating display of the rush mode, for example, a level suggesting effect may be performed by deriving a character or lines indicating that the rush level is 3 or higher.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the rush mode and the time saving mode, at the start of the variable display, a process of subtracting 1 from the variable number counter as the remaining number counting means is performed. As a result, the fluctuation number counter becomes "0" when the last fluctuation display in the rush mode and the time saving mode is started. That is, in this aspect example, when a big win or a small win is taught in one of the first variable display and the second variable display, the other variable display is interrupted instead of forcibly terminated, and the big win or the small win is made. It is configured to restart (do not erase) after the state ends.

Therefore, for example, when the first variable display is started after the second variable display is started as the last variable display in the rush mode and before the second variable display is stopped and displayed, the first variable display is started. If the fluctuating display is set to the first fluctuating time corresponding to the rush mode, the first fluctuating display is performed as it is even after the rush mode shifts to the normal mode, causing a sense of discomfort (for example, the first fluctuating display that is completely off). It is feared that the first variable display is performed for nearly 40 seconds despite the variable display. In this regard, by subtracting the number of fluctuation counter at the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation display that starts after the last fluctuation display in rush mode can be set to correspond to the normal mode, avoiding the occurrence of the above discomfort. can do.

Furthermore, for example, the second to last variation display in the rush mode is the first variation display (disappearance), and immediately after the start of the first variation display, the last second variation display in the rush mode (small win) is started, for example, if the previous first variable display is 40 seconds and the later second variable display is 4 seconds, the first variable display will be performed for nearly 36 seconds in the normal mode, If the first variable display is completely off, a sense of discomfort will occur.

In this regard, in this aspect, regarding the second variable display at the end of the rush mode, the second variable time determination table for the support last of FIG. 53(b) is referenced to determine the second variable time. It has become. The second rush variation time determination table for the support last is configured to set a relatively long variation time (20 seconds or 25 seconds in this example). Therefore, even if the above situation occurs, the first variable display is a little less than 20 seconds at the longest, and the discomfort can be suppressed.

As for the display mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 in the rush mode, for example, the daily lives of Mr. A and Mr. B are displayed on the left and right sides of the screen, and depending on the result of the event that has occurred to Mr. A, the The result of the first variable display is taught, and the result of the second variable display is taught according to the result of the event that occurred to Mr. B. That is, the display regarding Mr. A is the first variable effect display as the first variable corresponding effect display, and the display regarding Mr. B is the second variable effect display as the second variable corresponding effect display.

Furthermore, not all the results of the first variable display and the second variable display are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and priority is given according to the type of variable display. In this example, the fluctuation display (small hit fluctuation) corresponding to the small hit is displayed preferentially over the fluctuation display (off fluctuation) corresponding to the reach outside the front and back, and the big hit and the reach outside the front and back. The corresponding fluctuation display (jackpot fluctuation, front/rear deviation fluctuation) is preferentially displayed over the small hit fluctuation. Moreover, when the variable display of the same type is performed in parallel, the one that is stopped and displayed first has priority. Furthermore, even if the variable display is of the priority type, if the time until the stop display does not become equal to or less than the predetermined time, the same priority as the outlier variation is given.

Here, the relationship between the first variable display, the second variable display, and the display mode in the decorative design display device 42 will be described with reference to FIG. First, when the first variation display, which is a loss variation, and the second variation display, which is a small winning variation, are performed in parallel, the second effect variation display is given priority in the decorative symbol display device 42, Since there are four seconds or more until the second variable display is stopped, the first variable effect display and the second variable effect display are displayed in common. It is displayed (t1 to t2; mixed effect display state). When the remaining time of the second variable display becomes 4 seconds or less, Mr. B's event occurs as the second effect variable display, and it is displayed that there will be a small win (for example, complete one job; t2 to t3). ; second effect display state). Along with the display of winning the small win, the first variable display is interrupted and the small win state is started.

After the small winning state (t3 to t4), when the first variation display that is the loss variation is resumed and the second variation display that is the small winning variation is started, the second effect variation display is given priority. Since there are four seconds or more until the second variable display is stopped, a common display is derived (t4-t5; mixed effect display state). When the remaining time of the second variation display becomes 4 seconds or less, the second effect variation display is derived. After that, the first variation display is stopped and displayed, and the first variation display that is the jackpot variation is displayed. It is started (t5-t6; second effect display state). In addition, in FIG. 54, the variation interval of the first variation display is omitted.

Although the jackpot fluctuation takes precedence over the small hit fluctuation, at the time when the first fluctuation display, which is the jackpot fluctuation, is started, there is 7 seconds or more until the stop display of the first fluctuation display, so the small hit fluctuation continues. A corresponding second effect variation display is derived (t6 to t7; second effect display state).

After that, after a small win state (t7 to t8), the first variation display is resumed, and the second variation display is newly started. Since there are four seconds or more until the stop display of the variable display, a common display is derived (t8 to t9; mixed effect display state).

When the remaining time of the second variable display becomes 4 seconds or less, the second effect variable display is derived (t9-t10; second effect display state). Further, when it takes 7 seconds or less until the stop display of the first variable display, the first variable display is derived instead of the second variable effect display (t10 to t11; first effect display state).

After that, the small win state of the second variable display is interposed, and the first variable display is also interrupted during that time, but the decorative pattern display device 42 continues to perform the first effect variable display during that time. (t11 to t12; pseudo first effect display state). After the end of the small winning state, the first variable display is resumed and even if the second variable display is started, the first effect variable display is continuously derived and the first variable display is stopped to generate the big winning state. (t12-t13; first effect display state).

Incidentally, in a state where only one of the first variable display and the second variable display is performed, the effect variable display corresponding to the variable display during the change is derived.

In addition, Mr. C appears on the decorative pattern display device 42 in the rush mode, and Mr. C's event may occur, and by succeeding in the event, a big hit with a rush with balls will occur. In other words, Mr. C does not correspond to either the first fluctuation display or the second fluctuation display, but corresponds to a 15-round rush jackpot, an 8-round rush jackpot, or a loss, and 15 rounds. A jackpot with a rush, a jackpot with an 8-round rush, or a loss can be selected with a predetermined probability when it occurs.

In the rush mode, when switching from the second effect variable display to the first effect variable display, the second effect variable display may be switched to the first variable display (a variable display with a high expectation of a big win is performed. It may be configured so that a switching effect as a mixed effect display state can be derived. After the switching effect is derived, it may be switched to the first effect variable display, or may be returned to the second effect variable display (fake effect), or the first effect variable display and the second effect variable display may be switched. Although it is not possible to specify which one, it may be switched to an effect variable display (Mr. C's display; mixed effect display state) indicating that the variable display is advantageous for the player.

In addition, in the rush mode, it is advantageous for the player to consume as many second variable displays as possible without using the first variable display as much as possible. A first remaining time display indicating the time until (stopped display) and a second remaining time display indicating the time until the second variable display is stopped displayed may be derived. It is

For example, when the first variation display that becomes the jackpot variation is started, the clock is displayed, the event occurrence time is displayed, and the clock display is also updated as time passes. may be derived. When the first remaining time display is derived, the first variable effect display (first remaining time display) is displayed together with the second variable effect display even in a state where the second variable effect display is preferentially displayed, Along with the clock, a display corresponding to the approaching stop display timing is derived, such as Mr. A's "sleeping", "getting up and getting ready", "going out", and the like.

Mr. B grasps Mr. A's schedule and makes a second suggestion of the number of times the second variable display is to be stopped before the first variable display is stopped, such as "I wonder if I can do XX times more." A time remaining indication may be derived.

Also, when the entering ball count switch 226 is detected, an event of Mr. B occurs in the decorative pattern display device 42, and when a ball is entered into the specific ball entering section 145, the event success. An indication of event failure is derived when a ball is entered into the non-specific ball entering portion 146 and the value of the entering ball counter becomes "0".

In addition, in this embodiment, a maximum of four first variable displays can be reserved and stored, and a maximum of four second variable displays can be reserved and stored. 1 and 4 each of the second special variable reservation areas are provided). Furthermore, in the decorative pattern display device 42, a first pending icon as a first pending display indicating suspension of the first variable display, and a second pending icon as a second pending display indicating suspension of the second variable display. Is displayed. The function of displaying the first and second pending icons constitutes first and second pending display means.

In addition, in this aspect example, when the sub-control device 262 receives the starting command from the main control device 261 and adds one pending icon, the information related to the winning or losing lottery included in the starting command, the reach pattern, the fluctuation time, etc. Based on the variation information, it is configured to be able to derive a suspension icon (a prefetch suspension icon) having a specific mode that suggests the contents of the variation information.

For example, of the first pending display area displaying the first pending icon of the first variable display, the first pending icon displayed second in the pending corresponding area corresponding to the pending area of the first pending information storage area, Suppose that it is displayed as a look-ahead pending icon indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high. In this case, before the look-ahead pending icon is consumed (the corresponding first variable display is stopped and displayed), the game is played while hoping to generate a big win in relation to the second variable display. It is possible to impart a feeling of tension or the like to the game. In this example, the prefetch suspension icon corresponds to the prefetch suspension effect.

As described above, in this aspect example, the rush level is set in the rush mode. The ratio between the number of times of display and the number of times of second variable display can be changed. That is, the rush mode is always continued when the jackpot state is won in relation to the second variable display, which is advantageous for the player. It is desirable to perform variable display. Therefore, regarding the setting of the first variable time and the second variable time, there are a plurality of level correspondence tables (medium short table and medium long table in FIG. 53(a), and , the short table and the very short table in FIG. 53(b)), and when the rush mode is provided, a combination of the first variable time determination table and the second variable time determination table that can be referred to in the rush mode. , it is possible to prepare a plurality of levels of rush modes having different advantages for the player. As a result, while suppressing complication of control, it is possible to add depth to the game and to diversify the effects, thereby suppressing monotony and improving interest. Furthermore, since a plurality of level correspondence tables are provided in both the first variable time determination table and the second variable time determination table, the number of combination patterns increases, and the effects are further achieved. In particular, in the rush mode, when an upper limit is set for the number of times the variable display is performed, the first variable display as the undesirable variable display is performed even if the first variable display is not won. (the proportion of the second variable display that can be performed relatively decreases), so this effect becomes more pronounced.

Also, if the level determination process is performed when the rush mode is provided, and the determination is followed after that, in the rush mode after that, when setting each of the first variable display and the second variable display, it is possible to correspond to a plurality of levels. It is possible to save the trouble of selecting which of the tables to refer to by lottery or the like, and it is possible to simplify the control when setting each variable display.

In the rush mode, by shooting a game ball aiming at the second starting prize winning device 33c, the game ball can also enter the first support starting prize winning device 33b. Therefore, in the rush mode, It is possible to establish the above-described game characteristics such that the rush mode is divided into levels according to the difference in the pitch at which the first variable display and the second variable display are performed.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a level suggesting effect for suggesting a rush level can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy guessing what the rush level is.

In addition, the results of the first win/fail lottery and the second win/fail lottery are reliably taught by the variable display of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, and the first special display device 43a, Further, it is possible to convey more dramatically through the first effect variable display and the second effect variable display performed by the decorative pattern display device 42 corresponding to the variable display of the second special display device 43b. In addition, in the first variable effect display and the second variable effect display, by performing a display such as a supplementary explanation, it is possible to make it easier to understand how the result of the lottery will be and what will happen in the future. , you can enjoy the game more. For example, between t9 and t13 in FIG. 54, the first variation display, the second variation display, and the small winning state are mixed up, and it is difficult to grasp even if the special display devices 43a and 43b are visually recognized, but the decorative pattern display If the device 42 is visually recognized, at the timing of t10 (the display of Mr. B, which is the second variable effect display, is switched to the display of Mr. A, which is the first variable effect display), the first variable display results in a big win. (Mr. A continues to be displayed until t13, and at t13, the display that Mr. A succeeds in the event is made.) At t13, he clearly grasps that he has won a big hit in the first fluctuation display. can do.

In addition, in the decorative pattern display device 42, in the rush mode, it is possible to derive a first remaining time display suggesting the remaining time of the first variable time and a second remaining time display suggesting the remaining time of the second variable time. is configured to In other words, which of the first variable display and the second variable display is stopped first can be grasped from the remaining time display. Therefore, by looking at the remaining time display, it is possible to anticipate the development of the game based on the time difference between the first variable display and the second variable display, find out the timing of the break, find new pleasures, and improve the convenience of the schedule. You can try to improve. For example, in addition to the result of the winning lottery, the timing of the stop display of the first and second variable displays may be changed with the desire that the second variable display should be stopped and displayed as soon as possible before the first variable display. It is possible to have the player find interest, and it is possible to improve performance and game performance.

In addition, in this aspect example, since the fluctuation number counter that counts the remaining number of times of the rush mode is updated when the fluctuation display is started, the fluctuation display corresponding to the upper limit of the rush mode is started and then terminated. In the case where the other variable display is started during this period, it is possible to reliably set the other variable display corresponding to the game state when the rush mode ends. Therefore, even though the high-ball-entering state has ended, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the variable time period corresponding to the high-ball-entering state is set, causing inconvenience or discomfort. The effect display corresponding to the variable display corresponding to the gaming state after the high-ball-entering state ends is derived after the effect display corresponding to the variable display corresponding to the high-ball-entering state is stopped and displayed. You can do it. In this case, it is possible for the player to more reliably enjoy the variable display corresponding to the upper limit of the high-ball-entering state.

Further, in the case where the first variation time is set to be long and the second variation time is set to be short in the high-ball-entering state, the variation display corresponding to the upper limit of the high-ball-entering state is the first. In the case of two-variation display, when the first variation display is started immediately before the second variation display, the second variation display corresponding to the upper limit is stopped and the high-probability state ends. , the first variable display does not end easily, and there is a concern that a problem or discomfort may occur.

In this regard, when setting the second variation time corresponding to the upper limit of the high probability state, instead of referring to the level correspondence table, which sets the variation time to be relatively short as before, a special last table is used. By making the second variation time as close to the first variation time as possible, the remaining time of the first variation display of the already started first variation display is too long after the end of the high-probability state. (For example, it is possible to make the remaining time similar to the first variation time of the first variation display in the low-probability state). Therefore, even though the high-ball-entering state has ended, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the variable time period corresponding to the high-ball-entering state is set, causing inconvenience or discomfort.

Further, in this aspect example, when one of the first variable display and the second variable display is stopped and the other variable display is performed, one of the variable displays is displayed. When it is taught that a big win state and a small win state will occur in , the other fluctuation display is interrupted, and after the end of the big win state or small win state taught in the one fluctuation display, it is interrupted. The other variable display is configured to resume where it left off. Therefore, in the rush mode, it is desired that the second variable display that facilitates the selection of a more advantageous jackpot type for the player when winning the jackpot state is sequentially stopped and displayed, and that the first variable display is not stopped and displayed as much as possible, It is possible to establish game characteristics such that the level of the rush mode, in which the ratio of the number of times the first variable display and the second variable display are performed per predetermined time is different as a result, is expected to be favorable. . Further, the second variable display is performed while the first variable display is performed once, instead of simply determining which of the first variable display and the second variable display is started at the same time and which one is stopped and displayed first. It is possible to give the playability of how many times the game can be played.

Furthermore, in this aspect example, in the decorative pattern display device 42, the first A pending icon is derived and a second pending icon is derived (basically corresponding to the second pending lamp of the second pending display 46b) to indicate that there is pending storage of the second floating display. It's like Furthermore, as the first pending icon and the second pending icon, there is a case where a prefetch pending icon suggesting the content of the first variable display and the second variable display is derived. Therefore, it is possible to combine the information of the first remaining time display and the information of the second remaining time display, and enjoy considering the development. That is, it is desirable to generate as many big wins as possible with respect to the second variable display before the first variable display, which is likely to indicate a big win, is stopped and displayed. A first remaining time display that is likely to be displayed and that the first variable display during fluctuation is likely to have 25 seconds or more remaining is derived, and four are held during the fluctuation of the first variable display. Since the second remaining time display is derived that the second variable display is almost finished, the second variable display should be stopped about eight times before the first variable display is stopped, so at least once. Consideration such as wanting to make a big hit can be performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if one of the first variable display and the second variable display is instructed to win the big win state and the small win state, the other variable display is only interrupted and not erased, and the big win is made. Since it is configured to resume after the end of the state or the small winning state, even if the prefetching reservation icon suggesting the contents of the first and second fluctuation displays is derived ), avoiding any contradiction.

In the present embodiment, as in the above-described embodiment, if a game ball is shot aiming at the second starting prize winning device 33c in the rush mode, the game ball also enters the first support starting prize winning device 33b. Therefore, both the first variable display and the second variable display can be executed. In addition, since the rush mode is realized by increasing the ease with which a game ball enters the first support start winning device 33b, the player can voluntarily avoid the first variation display in the rush mode (the first execution of only two-variation display) can be suppressed. Further, the second starting prize winning device 33c is configured so that the game ball can enter relatively easily, and the second variable display can be progressed at a good tempo in the rush mode, and the exhilarating feeling etc. in the rush mode can be ensured. be able to. In addition, regarding the second start winning device 33c, even if the configuration is such that the game ball is always easy to enter, the second variation time is longer in the time saving mode and the normal mode, so the second variation display is not performed in the time saving mode and the normal mode. You can avoid the situation of being digested more and more.

Further, in the rush mode and in a state in which the first variable display and the second variable display are being performed, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the first variable display and the second variable display. Although one of them is derived, even if it is configured such that it is impossible to distinguish between the first variable effect display and the second variable effect display, the first special display device 43a, Also, when the second special display device 43b is viewed and one of them is not displayed in a variable manner, the one can be determined. In this regard, by providing a configuration for holding and storing the variable display, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the variable display is interrupted. Therefore, while referring to the first variable effect display and the second variable effect display, attention is paid to which of the first variable display and the second variable display is stop-displayed first. can be

In addition, in the rush mode, the remaining time of the first variable display and the second variable display is not displayed, or there is a period during which the display is not performed (for example, when it is always displayed until the next jackpot, and when the time jackpot is not displayed at all) It may be configured so that there is a case where it is not displayed, or a variable display corresponding to the case of winning a lottery as to whether or not to display at each variable display (only the variable display may be used, or multiple variable displays may be displayed) It may be configured so that the remaining display may be performed in the case where the remaining number is displayed). In this case, guessing the rush level can be more enjoyable.

(j; modified example of embodiment (i) with rush level)
(j-1; display mode of the decorative pattern display device 42) The display mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 in the rush mode in the example of the above mode (i) is not particularly limited. You may

While the first variable display and the second variable display of the rush mode are being performed, no special effect variable display is performed to teach the results of these variable displays (for example, the main character is running continuously). ). However, a display suggesting/teaching the remaining number of times of the rush mode is derived. Furthermore, even if a small win or a big win for 2RS occurs, the decoration pattern display device 42 does not display any particular corresponding to the small win or big win, and even if the 2RS wins, the remaining number of times of the rush mode is reset. is not performed. For this reason, it is difficult to know how long the rush mode will last.

On the other hand, when the 15RS, 8RS, and 4RN jackpot states are started, a settlement performance is generated. Then, in the fourth round in the big win state, the result of the final presentation is taught, and in the case of 4RN, it is "lost", and after the big win state, the game shifts to the time saving mode. On the other hand, in the case of 8 RN and 15 RN, it is "win", the game continues to the fifth round, and after the jackpot state ends, the rush mode is entered.

When adopting the configuration as described above, the display mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 in the rush mode can be made as simple as possible, and the demands of players who like simple effects can be met.

In addition, since the effect display of the decorative pattern display device 42 is just an effect, the timing of the start and end of the first effect variable display, the second effect variable display, the first variable display, and the second variable display are not necessarily synchronized.

(j-2; Rush Level Determination Process) In the above mode example (i), the rush level is determined by referring to the rush level determination table at the end of the jackpot based on the value of the rush level random number counter acquired at the start of winning. However, for example, when it is determined that a jackpot with rush has been won in the starting winning process or the variable display setting process, the rush level is determined and stored in the starting winning process or the variable display setting process. It may be configured to

In addition, in the above aspect example (i), the rush level is set only when the jackpot with rush is won in the normal mode and the time saving mode as the low state, but the rush level is the jackpot. It may be configured such that it is reset every time a state occurs (the level determination process is performed even if it is not determined that the state before the jackpot state was the normal mode or the time saving mode). Furthermore, it may be configured so that it is performed not every time but every predetermined number of times, or it may be configured to be performed at random such as when a predetermined lottery is won. In this case, there is a possibility that the rush level will be changed before and after the big win state, and it is possible to make the game more exciting.

Also, for example, a plurality of rush level determination tables with different allocation ratios of rush levels 1 to 4 (eg, a rush level 4 determination table in which rush levels 4 and 3 are likely to be selected, a rush level 4 determination table in which rush levels 3 and 2 are likely to be selected, etc.) 3 determination table, rush level 2 determination table in which rush levels 2 and 1 are likely to be selected, and rush level 1 determination table in which rush level 1 is likely to be selected), and winning a jackpot with rush in normal mode and time saving mode In addition, it may be configured to determine which rush level determination table to refer to in a series of rush modes before shifting to the normal mode, and store it in the rush table storage area. Furthermore, at the end of each jackpot state of the jackpot with rush, the rush level shown in the rush table storage area is determined based on the value of the rush level random number counter in the execution area in which the fluctuation information of the fluctuation display of the jackpot is stored. The table may be referenced to determine the rush level of the current rush mode (until the shift to the normal mode or the big win) is made and stored in the rush level storage area. In this case, the rush level may be changed before and after the jackpot state, but the range of the rush level to be selected is limited to a certain extent, giving a sense of unity of the series of rush modes, and providing more exciting gameplay. can do.

In addition, when the value of the hit/fail random number counter corresponding to the big win with rush state is acquired, or according to the game state when the big win with rush occurs, the rush level is sorted (for example, it will be referred to The allocation of the rush level determination table) may be configured differently. For example, the rush level determination table may be selected so that a rush level advantageous to the player is more likely to be selected when winning in the time saving mode than when winning in the normal mode.

(j-3: Remaining time display) The first remaining time display and the second remaining time display in the above example (i) are not particularly limited, and can be set as appropriate for each model. is. For example, a configuration that does not suggest the remaining time of the fluctuation display of complete loss, or a configuration that does not suggest the remaining time of the variation display of complete loss, loss other than before and after, and a small hit, or the first fluctuation display is a big hit or a loss before and after Only in the case of , the second variable display may be configured so that the remaining time display is derived only in the case of a big win or a small win (and furthermore, in the case of a configuration with a front-back deviation, a front-back deviation).

Furthermore, in addition to deriving the first remaining time display and the second remaining time display for the first variable display and the second variable display during the variable display, It may be configured so that a first remaining time display and a second time display can be performed. That is, when the variable display is retained and stored, the main controller 261 sends the sub-controller 262 the success-or-failure-related information about the success or failure lottery (whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss), reach type information, Variation information including information indicating whether the display is the first variation display or the second variation display and information on the variation time is output as the preceding command. Based on the preceding command (variation information contained in the preceding command is stored in the holding area of the fluctuation information storage area provided corresponding to the special fluctuation holding area of the main control device 261 in the sub-controller 262, and area), the sub-controller 262 determines that, in the rush mode, for example, the first variation display stored in the second holding area corresponds to the jackpot, and the changing second 1st variation time remaining 10 seconds, the first variation display stored in the retention first area is 30 seconds, and the first variation display stored in the retention second area is 30 seconds, so the first variation display is a big hit A first time remaining indication may be derived, such as 70 seconds remaining until the timing may be reached.

In this case, it is possible to suggest not only the variable display that is currently being displayed, but also the content of the variable display that is retained and stored. can be achieved. Furthermore, by combining the remaining time display including the withheld variable display and the suggestion of the content of the lottery of the withheld variable display, etc., the information that the player can obtain increases, and based on this, You can enjoy playing games.

Further, instead of or in addition to the configuration of displaying the remaining time on the main screen (area including the center of the screen) of the decorative design display device 42, the remaining time may be displayed with a pending icon, or the decorative design may be displayed. A display device that can display the remaining time separately from the device 42 (liquid crystal display device, EL display device, matrix display device, segment display device, meter display device (with movable needle), multiple lamps, multiple colors A lamp capable of emitting light, etc.) may be provided in the area. For example, a meter display device is provided together with the decorative pattern display device 42, and in the rush mode, the meter display device holds the first variation display, which is said to have a high degree of expectation for a big win (corresponding to a big win or a front-to-rear loss), The meter display as the first remaining time display continues to fall from the reference position, and the first fluctuation display, which is a big hit, is stopped and displayed to become "0" (returns to the original if it is out of the front or back). In the decorative pattern display device 42, a display suggesting the reliability of the jackpot expectation degree of the first variation display, which is said to be a high jackpot expectation degree, and the reliability of the remaining time display by the meter display device, or the first variation display during fluctuation. display of the first remaining time, second remaining time display of the second variable display during fluctuation, or display of the second remaining time until stop display of the second variable display that has been suspended, etc. You may

In this way, by providing a plurality of effect display means capable of displaying the remaining time display, for example, the remaining time display can be derived to the plurality of effect display means to clarify the difference in meaning, etc., or be displayed in an attractive manner. In addition, when the remaining time display on a predetermined effect display means becomes an obstacle, another effect display means can be used for display (collectively displayed). Therefore, it is possible to improve designability, convenience, and the like. Also, multiple first time remaining indications showing the same object are derived to increase the reliability of the first time remaining indication, or multiple first time remaining indications showing different objects are derived to provide more information. can be given. In addition, the decorative pattern display device 42 and another display means may display the second remaining time for the same second variable display, or may display the second remaining time for different second variable display. It may be configured to be able to display.

Alternatively, instead of displaying the remaining time, or in addition, a suggestion may be made by voice. In other words, in addition to the configuration in which the remaining time is displayed and the corresponding voice is derived, for example, when the effect button 125 or the like is operated, a voice suggesting the remaining time may be derived.

It is also possible to omit one or both of the first remaining time display and the second remaining time display. However, by performing the first remaining time display in a configuration in which the big win related to the second variable display is more advantageous than the big win related to the first variable display, the rush mode has more exciting game characteristics. can be given.

Furthermore, for example, in the first variable effect display and the second variable effect display, it is possible to derive a result display effect in which the result of the corresponding variable display is suggested and taught, and a climax effect performed immediately before the result display effect. and the climax effect is started in one of the first effect variable display and the second effect variable display (may be limited to the second effect variable display which is advantageous when winning the jackpot state). In this case, the result display effect may be performed before the other, and the corresponding variable display may be stopped and displayed. In this case, when the climax effect is started, it is possible to grasp which of the first variable display and the second variable display is stop-displayed first, so that the user can enjoy the climax effect while concentrating. .

(j-4) In the example of (i) above, the first variation display in the rush mode is the middle variation, but the variation time is not particularly limited, and the rush level can be changed. In order to increase the number of stages, for example, the first variable display may be set to a short variation (in a rush mode, the first variable display may be shortened, which is not preferable).

In addition, the pending look-ahead effect is not limited to the configuration performed by the pending icon 461, and for example, a series of effects over a plurality of variable effects displays (continuous notice; if it occurs, the expectation of the next variable display increases). This is the purpose of including the effect that is performed in the pending look-ahead effect.

(j-5) The display of the remaining time is not limited to the configuration of displaying the time. It may be suggested (which may be explicitly stated or may be indicated), or simply which of the first variable effect display during variation and the second variable effect display is stopped first. (The first variable effect display and the second variable effect display may be performed in such a manner as to compete with each other). Furthermore, it is also possible to make a suggestion/instruction such as "do not stop yet" or "do not stop until at least...".

(j-6) The display of the remaining time is not limited to the configuration performed by digital display means such as a liquid crystal display device, and the remaining time may be displayed using a movable accessory or the like. . Furthermore, it is not limited to the configuration in which numbers are directly written on the movable accessories, etc., but may be structured so that the player can understand and guess by associating the movable accessories with the remaining time, etc. may For example, a "rabbit" movable accessory is drawn into the visible range in association with the first variable effect display, and a "tortoise" movable accessory is drawn out in the visible range in association with the second variable effect display. Thus, it may be suggested that the first variable effect display ends earlier than the second variable effect display. Further, for example, as the hold icon 461, a first character, a second character, and a third character are displayed, and a display device ( For example, in a liquid crystal display device), the first character, the second character, and the third character play a predetermined game, and the variable display of the hold icon corresponding to the losing character is first stop-displayed. It may be done.

(j-7) The contents of the first effect variation display and the second effect variation display are not particularly limited. may be configured to be displayed in parallel, or a state in which both the first variable effect display and the second variable effect display can be displayed (first special display device 43a, second special display device 43a, Even if both the display devices 43b are performing variable display), the decorative pattern display device 42 displays only the effect variable display corresponding to one of them, or is configured so that there may be such a case. good too. In addition, for example, instead of the second variable effect display, which has a relatively high possibility of obtaining favorable results for the player, a crisis avoidance effect is performed, such as whether or not the first variable effect display is stopped and displayed. In case of failure, the second effect variation display is displayed, and in the case of failure, the first effect variation display is continued until the stop display, and the result of the first variation display may be displayed. . Incidentally, although the remaining time display is likely to cause the first effect variable display to be stopped and displayed, the remaining time display may stop the first variable display by displaying a display that is not the remaining time such that the remaining time is not yet finished. It is possible to perform an effect that gives the player a sense of security that the player can grasp the

Further, for example, the second effect variable display is not displayed from its start time, and is replaced in the middle of the first effect variable display to derive the second effect variable display (especially when the expectation of a big win is high. It is desirable to make it easy to do so). In this case as well, the remaining time display shows the remaining time until the second variable effect display is stopped, although the decorative pattern display device 42 is currently performing the first variable effect display. However, it is also possible to perform a sense of incongruity effect such that a time that does not seem to be the time until the stop of the first effect variation display is taught.

(j-8) In addition, both the first variable effect display and the second variable effect display are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and both the variable effect displays are ended or started at the same time. It may be configured so that there is a case where the effect to be shown can be derived. For example, it may be configured such that two effect variable displays are finally combined (with split screens, or the split screens are combined to form one screen) to provide a more expected effect.

For example, in a state in which both the first effect variation display and the second effect variation display are displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, the probability variable jackpot occurs when the first effect variation display corresponding to the loss is remaining 30 seconds. There is a pattern in which when the corresponding second variable effect display of 20 seconds is started, the timing of stopping the first variable effect display is matched with the setting of the second variable effect display at the start of the second variable effect display. When selected by lottery, a corresponding performance pattern is set for the second performance variation display, the remaining time for the first performance variation display is adjusted to 20 seconds, and the remaining time for the first performance variation display is set to 10 seconds. At this stage, the effect of the first variable effect display is changed to a pattern determined when setting the effect pattern of the second variable effect display different from the flow up to that point (for example, from the flow of effect pattern A , a cut-in effect, etc., and change to the effect pattern B).

Also, for example, when the first effect variable display is started and completed during the derivation period of the first effect variable display, the second effect variable display corresponding to the big win is derived (this determination is A flag or the like may be set so that it is possible to discriminate when the second effect variation display corresponding to the big win is held, and associate it with the corresponding first effect variation display, so that the fact can be understood, or the first effect. Regarding the setting of the variable display, it may be configured to perform the above determination), and perform an effect that waits for the start of the first variable effect display (it takes time until the start of the second variable effect display) (set as the time of the standby effect), and the effect display may be performed as if the first variable effect display and the second variable effect display were started at the same time.

(k; Remaining time display) In the above embodiment, for example, the decoration pattern display device 42 (effect display means) displays the first remaining time indicating the remaining time of the first variable time and the remaining second variable time. At least one of the second remaining time indications suggesting time may be derivable. In this case, by displaying the remaining time, it is possible to provide guidance/explanation or the like that helps the understanding of the game, such as performing the first variable display and the second variable display in parallel, or to enhance the performance. Looking at the display, it is possible to predict the development of the game due to the time difference between the first variable display and the second variable display, find out the timing of breaks, find new pleasures, and improve the convenience of the schedule. be able to.

For example, in a state in which the first variable display and the second variable display are performed in the rush mode, the first variable display in the support mode is the first variable display in the normal mode and the time saving mode. A guide display that teaches that the fluctuation time is getting longer may be configured so that it can be derived.

That is, in the above-described embodiment, the first variable display is set to 120 minutes or longer in the rush mode. is also stopped (erased), it is conceivable that some players do not notice the lengthening of the first variable display. For this reason, there is a concern that the user will become overly anxious about not interrupting the second variable display in the rush mode. In this respect, as in this embodiment, by teaching that the first fluctuation time in the rush mode is long and understanding that even if the start of the second fluctuation display is delayed, there is not much trouble, there is some leeway. It is possible to play a game by holding it, and it is possible to improve the comfort in the game, for example, by releasing the hand from the shooting operation means for shooting the game ball.

Further, for example, in the rush mode, in a state where only the first variable display is being executed out of the first variable display and the second variable display, it is possible to teach or suggest the first variable time of the first variable display being executed. A time remaining indication may be configured to be derivable.

In other words, even if the first fluctuation time in the rush mode is set to be long and there is enough time to go to the bathroom, purchase beverages, or the like, it is conceivable that the user cannot leave the seat due to anxiety. In this respect, according to this aspect, since the remaining time display that teaches or suggests the remaining time of the first fluctuation time of the rush mode can be derived, the remaining time display can be confirmed and the driver can leave the vehicle without worry. can be seated. Therefore, it is possible to improve convenience and the like. As for the remaining time display, it is also possible not to pinpoint the stop timing, for example, "There are XX minutes or more until the first variable display is stopped."

Further, for example, the remaining time display may be derived and deleted according to the operation of the effect button 125 or the like as the effect operation means. In this case, a player who does not plan to leave the seat and feels that the display of the remaining time is an annoyance while continuing to play can erase the display of the remaining time. can be displayed.

In addition, the remaining time display is not only the time until the end of the effect variation display, but also the end or start of a predetermined effect part in one effect change display (up to a predetermined teaching/suggestion in one effect change display). time) may be displayed (may be displayed in parallel with the remaining time until the end of the effect variation display, or may be displayed independently).

The decorative symbol display device 42 may be configured to be able to execute a display that changes the remaining time as an effect related to the display of the remaining time (for example, an effect accompanying the operation of the effect button 125). For example, the results of a plurality of times of the first variable display may be collectively displayed in a series of first effect variable displays. That is, if the first effect variable display is not stop-displayed at the timing of the stop-display of the first variable display, the first variable display may be associated with the failure. Furthermore, for example, the first variable effect display and the second variable effect display may be configured to appropriately add effects, and when a pattern for extending the remaining time is selected in the effect related to the remaining time display, It may be configured to extend the currently performed first effect variable display or second effect image variable display to the suspended variable display (replace or recreate the effect so that it appears to be connected). . Conversely, for example, initially, the first effect variable display was planned to be performed across two first variable displays, but in the effect related to the remaining time display, if a pattern that shortens the remaining time is selected, each first variable display will be performed. Corresponding to one variable display, the first variable effect display may also be terminated (replace or modify the effect so that the variable effect display can be seen individually corresponding to each variable display). .

(l; sub-display devices adjacent to special display devices 43a and 43b) first sub-display device as first sub-display means controlled directly or indirectly by sub-control device 262 as sub-control means; A second sub-display device is provided as second sub-display means, and the first sub-display device is arranged adjacent to the first special display device 43a and displays the first variable display of the first special display device 43a. The second sub-display device is arranged adjacent to the second special display device 43b and performs the second variable display of the second special display device 43b. may be provided with a display section similar to the display section of .

In other words, no matter how much the decorative pattern display device 42 performs performance, if the first variable display and the second variable display of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b are visually recognized, a jackpot state will occur. (Even though one is in the variable display and the other variable display is pending, the other is not displayed in the variable display, so that it is understood that the one variable display is teaching the jackpot state), The type of the jackpot state is grasped, or even if it is hidden which of the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display the performance fluctuation display of the decorative pattern display device 42 corresponds to, it is grasped.

In this regard, according to this aspect example, it becomes difficult to understand which display mode is the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, and in addition, the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b It is possible to make the confirmation display pattern of the special display device 43b difficult to understand (make it difficult to make an instant judgment). Therefore, for example, while visually recognizing the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b, a player who tries to play an efficient game based on such information, the first special display device 43a, and A game in which a player who does not grasp the second special display device 43b or who dares not visually recognize the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b because he/she wants to enjoy the performance of the decorative pattern display device 42 or the like. It is possible to minimize the difference in game results (for example, the difference in the game value that is finally obtained) between the player and the player. In other words, the first special display device 43a and the first special display device 43a and the first special display device 43a and the It is possible to prevent a situation in which a player who does not visually recognize the second special display device 43b loses money. As a result, if the patterns of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b are grasped and the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b are not visually recognized, loss will occur. Such consciousness can be suppressed, and the performance display of the decorative pattern display device 42 can be fully enjoyed.

In addition, in order to make the display modes of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b difficult to understand, the first sub-display device and the second sub-display device controlled by the sub-control device 262 simulate We are going to display it. Therefore, for example, in order to make the display modes of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b difficult to understand, the display modes of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b are made more complicated. As compared with the case of using such devices, it is possible to reduce the control load of the main controller 261 and to simplify the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b.

It should be noted that "when the first variable display is performed, the first sub-display device performs the first pseudo-display whose start and end timings are synchronized with the first variable display, and performs the second variable display. If so, a second pseudo-display synchronized with the second variable display may be performed on the second sub-display device."

Further, in place of or in addition to the configuration in which the sub-display device is provided, driving means for displacing the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b are provided so as to be displaced during stop display. By doing so, it may be configured to make it difficult to instantly determine the display mode of the first special display device 43a and the second special display device 43b.

(m; small win) In the above embodiment, the small win state does not end until the game balls in the specific area 141 of the second variable prize winning device 32b are exhausted. good. The configuration of the sorting device 149 and the like of the second variable winning device 32b is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately designed for each model. For example, as a distribution device, a stopping means is provided that can stop one game ball immediately upstream of the slide bar 149a, and at a predetermined timing (every predetermined cycle, or from the time of occurrence of a small hit state) (every cycle), or has a plurality of pocket portions that can accommodate game balls one by one, and rotates, and the guide destination is specified according to the pocket portion into which the game ball enters. Either the sphere portion 145 or the non-specific entrance sphere portion 146 may be determined.

(n: Display of the decorative symbol display device 42) In the above embodiment, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the first effect state in which the first effect variable display is derived, and the second effect in which the second effect variable display is derived. In the state, no decorative patterns are displayed, and the result of the winning lottery is taught by the action of an animation character or the like. is not particularly limited to such a configuration, and can be appropriately set for each model.

In the above-described embodiment, the variable effect display in the first effect state (the variable display of decorative symbols, which is basically the first variable display) starts when the special display devices 43a and 43b start the predetermined variable display. is configured to end with the end of the predetermined variable display. It may be configured to end when the variable display ends. In other words, although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, even in the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols from which the continuous advance notice effect is derived, each time the variable display of the corresponding special display devices 43a and 43b ends, the decorative symbols are displayed. It is configured to stop and display the design. On the other hand, the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols corresponding to the variable displays of the plurality of special display devices 43a and 43b is expanded (the stopped mode of the decorative symbols is displayed (large in the center as in the above embodiment)). It may be configured to be able to derive an effect that does not occur and is developed even during the fluctuation interval).

In the above-described embodiment, when a small win is won in the second display state, the shoal of fish is configured to perform a predetermined action on the decorative pattern display device. may be configured. Furthermore, in the second effect variation display in the second display state, the display mode is such that it is difficult to distinguish between the small win state and the second variation display. A display mode may be derived in which it is possible to grasp that the player is in a small winning state (instead of the mode of teaching winning). Incidentally, it is also possible to omit the decorative design display device 42 .

(O) Production using the mode and display position of the pending icon 461 displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 and the pending icon 461 461 corresponding effects (suggestion of the degree of expectation of a big hit, etc.) can be appropriately set for each model. Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the pending icon corresponding to the second variable display is configured not to be derived, but may be configured to be derived. However, when the game ends in the normal mode, if the hold icon corresponding to the second variable display is displayed The game is ended even during the variable display), and there is a concern that ending the game with the second variable display left may increase discomfort, so it is desirable not to display it.

In addition, when displaying the pending icon corresponding to all variable displays, it may be possible to further display detailed information of the pending icon. For example, any of the pending icons can be configured to be arbitrarily selectable (for example, by performing an action such that the player touches the corresponding pending icon, or a menu screen dedicated to variable display on the decorative pattern display device 42 → By selecting the item of the pending icon, and furthermore, aligning the cursor displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 with the target pending icon), the contents of the corresponding variable display (first variable display and second variable display and the degree of expectation (only within a teachable range), etc.) may be displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, it is possible to detect the proximity or contact of an object to multiple locations of the decorative pattern display device 42, and the proximity detection means (e.g., light emitting unit and a proximity detection sensor having a light receiving portion, a touch panel, or the like) may be provided. For example, when the player brings his finger or the like close to the reserved icon 461 displayed in the reserved display area 462 of the decorative pattern display device 42, the mode of the reserved icon 461 is changed based on the detection of the finger or the like. It may be configured so that it may change or move. In this case, interest in the pending icon 461 can be enhanced.

(p) In the above embodiment, the main controller 261 determines the firing timing (the firing interval) of the launcher 60, but the configuration is not particularly limited to this. It may be configured to measure the timing (interval between shots). In this case, the control burden on the main controller 261 can be reduced.

(q) In the above embodiment, the arrangement and number of variable ball entry means (variable prize winning devices 32a, 32b), start ball entry means (start prize winning devices 33a, 33b, 33c), through gates 34, etc. are also particularly limited. It can be arranged as appropriate for each model. In addition, the first support start winning device 33b may be configured so that a game ball can enter even in the closed state. However, in the above-described embodiment, it is desirable that even if the player continues to hit to the right in the normal game state, it is not particularly important (a loss) for the player compared to the case of hitting to the left, so the first support. It is desirable that the starting prize winning device 33b is configured so that it is impossible to enter a ball when it is closed.

(r) In the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 and a server operated by a game machine manufacturer or the like exchange data (so-called mobile-linked game) via a communication mobile terminal or the like owned by the player. It may be configured to do so. Furthermore, when the mobile-linked game is to be terminated, the two-dimensional code including the current game information is displayed on the decoration pattern display device 42, and the player reads the two-dimensional code with the mobile communication terminal and In a configuration in which the game information is transmitted to the server by accessing the server, the pachinko machine 10 has a variation counter that counts the number of variations of the special display devices 43a and 43b, and counts the number of occurrences of various jackpot states. A jackpot counter or the like may be provided, and the two-dimensional code displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 at the end of the mobile-linked game may include information indicating the values of the various counters. Furthermore, the two-dimensional code may include information on the total number of shots of game balls, the types of derived effects, the number of times, the number of times the player has operated the effect button 125 during the button effects, and the like. good too. In this case, the game machine maker side can grasp the game situation.

The value of the above counter is erased by two-dimensional encoding, and other values are stored (even if the power is turned off) (erased when the power is turned on while operating the RAM erase switch). You can do it. Also, regarding the tendency of the behavior pattern of the pseudo wing member 431, the player may be configured to be able to select from several types (regarding the player who is playing the mobile-linked game).

(s) In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, and the opening/closing patterns of the variable winning devices 32a and 32b for each jackpot type are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rush mode and the time-saving mode are configured to be the upper limit when the first and second variable displays are performed a total of 70 times, and the mode is shifted to the normal mode. is not particularly limited, and can be set for each model.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, setting a low probability state in which a jackpot state is won with a first probability in the first lottery and a high probability state in which a jackpot state is won with a second probability higher than the first probability. may be In this case, for example, a low ball state, a low probability state, and a normal mode of the first variation state, a high ball state, a low probability state, and a short time mode of the first variation state, and a high A ball state, a low probability state, and a special time-saving mode with a second variation state, a high ball state, a high probability state, and a rush mode (probability variable mode) with a second variation state, and a low input It is possible to set a ball state, a high probability state, and a latent probability mode of the first variation state, etc., and diversification of game characteristics and effects can be achieved. In addition, the upper limit of the rush mode may be set to the next big win state.

The decoration symbol display device 42 may be configured so that the instruction of the game mode to be shifted after the end of the big win state is always performed until the corresponding big win state ends at the latest, or the corresponding big win state ends. Even if it is not performed even if it is internally in the variable probability mode, the decorative symbol display device 42 may be configured to shift to the same production stage as the special time saving mode.

In addition, the probability of winning in the ball entry support lottery and the opening and closing pattern of the start winning device with the blade member 37 (in this example, the first support start winning device 33b) when winning can be set as appropriate for each model. be. Furthermore, the winning upper limit of the game ball in one release to the first support starting winning device 33b may be set, or may not be set. More specifically, a starting winning upper limit counter for counting the number of game balls entering the first support starting winning device 33b until the winning upper limit is provided, and when opening the first support starting winning device 33b , a value corresponding to the winning upper limit is set for the starting winning upper limit counter, and when the first support starting winning winning switch 224b is detected, the value of the starting winning upper limit counter is subtracted by 1; In the open state of the 1-support start-up prize-winning device 33b, even if the timing to close the device 33b has not yet arrived, if the value of the start-up prize-winning upper limit counter becomes "0", the first support immediately. The starting winning device 33b may be configured to be closed.

(t) The effect button 125 as the effect operation means in the above embodiment is configured so that the operation portion, which is a part that can be operated by the player, can be displaced between the operation position and the non-operation position. However, for example, the operating portion may be configured to be displaceable in a state in which the operating portion is not operated. That is, for example, the effect button 125 includes an operation portion, an operation detection switch (operation detection means) capable of detecting the operation portion displaced to the operation position, and a coil spring (biasing means) that biases the operation portion toward the non-operation position side. means), wherein a first state in which the operation unit in a non-operated state is positioned at a first position; A switching device (driving means for displacing the operating portion between the first position and the second position) as a switching means for switching between a second state in which the operating portion is positioned at a second position that protrudes greatly from the mounting portion (for example, the upper plate 19). etc.) may be provided. In this case, it is possible to liven up the production and improve the interest.

In addition, depending on the aspect of the effect button 125 in the operation effect, the suggestion of the degree of expectation for the big win may be configured to be executable. For example, the protrusion length can be adjusted stepwise or steplessly, and the protrusion amount may be changed according to the impression time display 471 . In addition, the effect button 125 can displace the operating portion between the operating position and the non-operating position regardless of whether it is at the first position or the second position (the operating portion displaced to the operating position is detected by the operation detection switch). ) may be configured.

(u) In the above embodiment, in the case of winning the jackpot in the winning lottery performed based on the ball entering the first normal start prize winning device 33a, The distribution ratio of the type of jackpot that can be given is different between when a jackpot is won in the winning lottery, but it may be the same. In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the number of game balls (prize balls) provided based on the balls entering the first normal start-up prize device 33a and the first support start-up prize device 33b is transferred to the second start prize-winning device 33c. Although the number of game balls given based on the number of entering balls is configured to be larger than that of the number of balls, it may be configured to be less or may be configured to be the same.

(v) In the above embodiment, the main processing (see FIG. 9) is followed by the normal processing (see FIG. 10) in the main controller 261, but the configuration is particularly limited to such a configuration. isn't it. For example, after step S111 of the main process, processing such as updating the counter value, which is performed in steps S210 to S219 of the normal processing in the above embodiment, is performed. The processing performed in steps S201 to S209 of the normal processing in the embodiment and the processing in step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt processing in the above embodiment may be performed. In addition, as the processing of step S401 in this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and if the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, the power failure is performed. A configuration can be mentioned in which a flag indicating the occurrence of is turned on. Further, the processing of step S401 may be performed separately as NMI interrupt processing, as in the above embodiment.

(w) In the above embodiment, at the start of the variable display of special symbols, it is confirmed again whether the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to winning, and the result of the confirmation process (such as a success/failure flag state), it is determined whether or not to generate a jackpot state, but it is also possible to set the variation pattern command based on the information on whether or not the jackpot state is determined during the start winning process. good. Further, in the above embodiment, when setting the variation pattern command, again, based on the values of the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, the first variation type counter CS1, and the second variation type counter CS2, the jackpot type and reach pattern etc. may be determined.

(x) A real-time clock capable of ascertaining the date and time may be provided, and a presentation mode may be derived according to the information on the date and time of the real-time clock. Also, it may be configured such that the effect that is likely to be selected is changed (the table for effect that is likely to be selected is changed) depending on the time or date.

(y) In the above embodiment, the first variation state in which the length of the second variation time for one time is set longer than the sum of the lengths of the first variation time for a plurality of times; The length of the first fluctuation time is configured to be changeable between a second fluctuation state set longer than the sum of the lengths of the second fluctuation times for a plurality of times, but for example, the normal mode Then, the first middle variable time determination table and the second long variable time determination table are referred to (first variable state), and in the time saving mode, the first middle variable time determination table and the second long variable time determination table table is referred to (as the first variation state), and in the rush mode, the first middle variation time determination table and the second short variation time determination table are referred to (first variation state and second variation display). It may be configured such that the state is set to a state in which the second variation time is shortened.

In addition, in the configuration in which the second start-up prize-winning device 33c is always allowed to enter a ball, and the normal mode is shifted to the rush mode with a big-hit state in between, a ball can be expected to enter the second start-up prize-winning device 33c in the big-hit state. By adopting a configuration in which the game ball is required to be shot (in this example, hit to the right), the second variation display is retained and stored during the jackpot state, and the second variation display is displayed directly at the start of the rush mode. can be started at Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the first variable display is performed and the second variable display is not performed even though the rush mode is started, and the game can be smoothly progressed.

(z) It may be implemented as a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, it may be applied to a pachinko machine without the specific ball-entering section 145 . Also, for example, the entry of a ball into the specific ball entry portion 145 may be configured to trigger the application of a rush mode (variable probability mode) instead of triggering the occurrence of a big win state. In this case, when a big win state in which a ball can be expected to enter the second variable prize winning device 32b occurs (the second variable prize winning device 32b is opened, but it is very short, and a big win state in which a ball cannot be expected to enter is set, A configuration may be adopted in which the rush mode (probability variable mode) is given only to a jackpot state in which the second variable prize winning device 32b is not opened.

[Appendix]
Technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described below.

A. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a shooting means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is to be generated. The variable display means performs a variable display for teaching the result of the lottery (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2006-271480).

In addition, as a kind of pachinko machine, a first start-up game machine in which a first win-or-fail lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a first special game state in which the first variable ball entry means is opened based on the entry of a game ball is performed. a ball means, a second starting ball-entering means for performing a second win-or-fail lottery as to whether or not to generate a second special game state in which the second variable ball-entering means is opened based on the entry of a game ball; An opening/closing member that changes between an open state that makes it possible or easy for a game ball to enter the second starting ball entering means and a closed state that makes it impossible or difficult to enter, and a second variable ball entering means. A machine (a so-called 1-type 2-type mixing machine) is known which is configured so that a game ball can be entered, and which includes specific ball entry means for generating a first special game state based on the entry of the game ball.

In the pachinko machine, in a normal game state, a ball cannot be expected to enter the second starting ball-entering means. It becomes a playability such as aiming at a special game state. Generally, in such a pachinko machine, the opening/closing member is easily opened, and a high ball entry state is set in which the game ball is easily entered into the second start ball entry means. A high ball entry state may be given after the end. Then, in the high ball entry state, the game ball is entered into the second starting ball entry means and the second special game is played with a higher probability than winning the first special game state in the second winning lottery (first winning lottery). state) to generate a second special game state, and enter a game ball into the specific ball entry means through the opened second variable ball entry means to aim for the first special game state. It becomes playfulness.

That is, in the high ball entry state, it is easier for the game ball to enter the second start ball entry means than in the low ball entry state, which is the normal game state, so that the decrease in the game ball (ball decrease) is suppressed. , the second lottery can be efficiently performed, and as a result, the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the first special game state is greatly increased. Further, after the first special game state is completed, the state is shifted to the high ball-entering state, and if the first special game state is won in the high-ball-entering state, the first special game state can be repeated without reducing the number of balls. Therefore, the high ball entry state is also a state in which the number of game balls to be held can be greatly increased.

By the way, after the end of the first special game state, if the state is shifted to the low ball entry state without intervening the high ball entry state, most of the players end the game at that timing. In other words, it is the timing when the number of game balls in hand increases the most, and in order to continue the game, the game must be started from a low ball entry state (the number of game balls in hand decreases relatively quickly). It feels like a high threshold for me. Therefore, the fact that the high ball winning state is not granted after the end of the first special game state is a strong motivation to end the game, and there is concern that the player's desire to play may be suppressed. For example, it is feared that the first special game state may endure when the player wants to enjoy the game a little longer, or the player may move to another gaming machine.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the desire to play games.

Means A-1. a game area in which a game ball shot by the shooting device is guided;
A first starting ball entering means and a second starting ball entering means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area;
a first starting ball entry detection means capable of detecting a gaming ball that has entered the first starting ball entry means;
a second starting ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the second starting ball entry means;
A first variable ball entry means and a second variable ball entry means configured to be able to change between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter and a closed state in which the ball cannot enter. ,
When the detection by the first starting ball entry detecting means is performed, a first win-or-fail lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a first special game state for opening the first variable ball entry means, and the a first special game generating means for generating the first special game state when winning the first lottery;
a first special display means for performing a first variable display with a first special symbol for teaching the result of the first winning lottery performed by the first special game generating means;
When detection by the second starting ball entry detection means is performed, a second special game state (small winning) is generated to open (the first winning lottery and) the second variable ball entry means. While performing a second winning lottery to determine whether or not to play, (generate the first special game state when winning the first winning lottery, and the second special game when winning the second winning lottery) a second special game generating means for generating a state;
A second special display means for performing a second variable display with a second special symbol for teaching the results of (the first lottery and) the second lottery performed by the second special game generating means;
a specific ball entry section into which the game ball entered by the second variable ball entry means can be entered;
a specific ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry section;
an accessory special game state generating means for generating the first special game state when detection by the specific ball-entering detection means is performed;
The first variable display in the first special display means and the second variable display in the second special display means can be executed in parallel,
Regarding the setting of the first variation time of the first variation display and the second variation time of the second variation display,
a first variation state in which the length of the second variation time for one time is set longer than the sum of the lengths of the first variation time for a plurality of times;
The length of the first variation time for one time is configured to be changeable between a second variation state set longer than the sum of the lengths of the second variation times for a plurality of times. Characteristic game machine.

According to the means 1, in a configuration in which the first variable display and the second variable display can be performed in parallel, the second variable time is considerably long (basically, only the first variable display is performed). It is configured to be changeable between a variable state and a second variable state in which the first variable time is considerably long (basically, only the second variable display is performed). As a result, for example, in the first variation state for the purpose of causing the first start ball entry means to enter the game ball and execute the first variation display, the normal game state in which the first variation time is the normal length and a first support state in which the first variation time is short and the first variation display can be advanced at a relatively high pitch, and the game ball is entered into the second starting ball entry means. In the second variation state for the purpose of executing the second variation display, it is possible to set a second support state in which the second variation time is short and the second variation display can proceed at a relatively high pitch. (It is also possible to set a game state in which the second variable time is normal). Therefore, three or more game states in which the game characteristics change can be imparted without providing the configuration of changing the probability of winning the first special game state in the first lottery, and as a result, the interest is improved. can be achieved.

For example, in the first support state and the second support state, the probability of winning the first special game state in the first winning lottery is always constant by giving a privilege that can suppress the loss of balls. Even in the configuration, the first support state and the second support state are states in which at least the ball can be held better than in the normal game state, and two game states are set which are more advantageous for the player than in the normal game state. be able to. Therefore, even if the second support state is not provided after the end of the first special game state, the first support state is provided instead of the normal game state, thereby reducing the disappointment of the player. , It is possible to improve the desire to play.

Moreover, in the first support state, basically, the first special game state cannot be generated unless the player wins in the first win-or-fail lottery. 2. The first special game state can also be generated when a game ball entered in the second variable ball entry means opened based on the winning lottery wins and enters the specific ball entry section. can. In this way, it is possible to firmly provide a difference in terms of advantages for the player between the first support state and the second support state, thereby improving game performance and performance.

Means A-2. By changing the easiness of entering a game ball into one of the first start ball entry means and the second start ball entry means, it is possible to enter a game ball into the one. The state can be changed between a ball-entering state and a high-ball-entering state in which a game ball is more likely to enter one of the states than the low-ball-entering state,
a normal game state that is the low ball entry state and the first variation state;
a first support state that is the high ball entry state and the first fluctuation state;
The gaming machine according to means A-1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be capable of changing between the high ball entry state and the second support state, which is the second variation state.

According to the means A-2, the action and effect of the above means 1, such as setting two game states more advantageous than the normal game state, can be achieved without fail.

In addition, when the first special game state is won in the first winning lottery based on the detection of the first start ball detection means, the first special game state is won in the first lottery based on the detection of the second start ball detection means. , and the game ball that wins the second special game state in the second winning lottery based on the detection of the second starting ball entry detection means and enters the second variable ball entry means that is in the open state. Compared to the case where the right to generate the first special game state (continue to the first special game state) is obtained by entering the specific ball entry section, the second support state is after the end of the first special game state. The probability of being assigned to the first special game state to be awarded may be low. In this case, it is possible to clearly distinguish the advantage between the first support state and the second support state.

Means A-3. The first start ball-entering means and the second start ball-entering means are arranged in the first support state and the second support state, respectively. A gaming machine according to means A-2, characterized in that the gaming machine is arranged so that a game ball fired aiming at the other of the means can also enter said one.

According to the means A-3, in either the first support state or the second support state, the game ball is entered into one of the first starting ball entering means and the second starting ball entering means. By making it easier to roll, it is configured to suppress ball loss. For this reason, both the first start-up ball entry means and the second start-up ball entry means are configured to switch between a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state (so-called "electric chews" are two). The control can be simplified, the cost can be reduced, etc., compared to the case of using a configuration that can be stored.

Further, even if a game ball enters the first starting ball entering means in the second support state or enters the second starting ball entering means in the first support state, the means A-1 , the first variable display is longer in the second support state, and the second variable display is set longer in the first support state, so the first variable display is rapidly consumed in the second support state. In addition, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the second variable display is rapidly consumed in the first support state.

Means A-4. The first starting ball entry means has an opening/closing member that can be displaced between an open position and a closed position, and has an open state in which a game ball can easily enter and a game ball in which it is more difficult to enter than in the open state. configured to be able to change between a closed state and a
The first starting ball entry means is configured to be more likely to be in the open state in the high ball entry state than in the low ball entry state,
The first starting ball-entering means is arranged so that a game ball launched so as to enter the second starting ball-entering means in the second support state can enter. The gaming machine according to means A-3.

According to the means A-4, the ease with which a game ball enters the first starting ball entering means changes. That is, for example, when the opening and closing member is provided in the second starting ball entering means, in the first support state, the second starting ball entering means is opened while allowing the game ball to enter the first starting ball entering means. Since it is possible to enter the game ball into the first starting ball entering means, it is possible to perform the first variable display while suppressing the ball loss. is the same as the normal game state.

In this respect, by providing the opening and closing member in the first starting ball entering means, it is easy for the game ball to enter the first starting ball entering means in the first support state (and the second support state), and in the normal game state, the As compared with the 1 support state, it is possible to add a configuration in which the game ball is difficult to enter the first starting ball entering means. Therefore, the difference between the first support state and the normal game state can be made clear, and the game can be sharpened.

Means A-5. The gaming machine according to means A-4, wherein the second starting ball-entering means is configured to allow a game ball to enter more easily than the first starting ball-entering means in the closed state.

According to the means A-5, the second variable display can be progressed at a good tempo in the second support state, and the exhilarating feeling in the second support state can be more assured. Further, with respect to the second starting ball entry means, even if the configuration is such that the game ball is always easy to enter, the second variation time becomes longer in the first support state and the normal game state. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the second variable display is rapidly digested at .

Further, for example, in a configuration in which the first variable display and the second variable display can be retained and stored, the first starter performs a game in which a game ball is entered into the first starting ball entry means and the first variable display is executed. From a state (for example, a first variation state) to a second state (for example, a second variation state) in which a game is played in which a game ball is entered into the second starting ball entry means and a second variation display is executed. In the case of transition, if the second starting ball entry means is opened only in the second state, or if it is difficult to be opened in the first state, the second variation will still occur at the start of the second state. There is a concern that the first variable display (only) will be performed without the display pending storage. Therefore, if it is more advantageous for the player to win the special game state in the second variation display than to win the special game state in the first variation display, the occurrence of such a situation will cause a decrease in interest. is concerned. In this regard, in a configuration in which the second starting ball-entering means is always allowed to enter a ball, and furthermore, the state is shifted from the first state to the second state with the special game state interposed therebetween, in the special game state, the second starting ball-entering means The second variable display is retained and stored during the special game state, and the second variable display is displayed directly at the start of the second state. can be started at Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the first variable display is performed and the second variable display is not performed even though the second state is started, and the game can be smoothly progressed.

Means A-6. As the first starting ball entry means,
A first normal starting ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter in any state;
In the low ball entry state, a game ball cannot be entered or is in a closed state in which it is difficult to enter, and in the high ball entry state, a game ball is allowed to enter or is in an open state in which it is easy to enter. 1 support start-up ball entry means.

According to the means A-6, the first start ball entry means is composed of the first support start ball entry means for realizing a high ball entry state and the first support start ball entry means for realizing the low ball entry state for enabling execution of the first winning lottery. It can be divided into the first normal start-up ball entry means and each can be installed at a suitable position. In other words, when the game ball is launched so that it can enter the first normal starting ball entry means, the game ball (in any state, the game ball can be entered) to the second start ball entry means The first support start ball entry means is arranged so that there is no possibility of entering the ball, or the first support start ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball struck so as to be able to enter the second start ball entry means is more likely to enter. can do. Therefore, the necessary and convenient functions can be exhibited more reliably in each game state, and the game can proceed more smoothly.

It should be noted that "the first support starting ball-entering means may be arranged downstream of the second starting ball-entering means in the game area". In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the first support starting ball-entering means in the open state prevents the ball from entering the second starting ball-entering means.

Means A-7. When one of the first variable display and the second variable display is statically displayed and the other variable display is performed, the first variable display is performed in the one variable display. When it is taught that the special game state and the second special game state will occur,
The other variable display is forcibly stop-displayed in a manner of teaching a disconnection, and after the end of the first special game state or the second special game state taught in the one variable display, the forcible The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-6, characterized in that the other variable display is performed next to the other variable display that is stop-displayed.

When the first special game state is won in the first winning lottery relating to the first variation display, and the first special game state is shifted from the first variation state to the second variation state with the first special game state interposed therebetween, the second variation state is displayed after the first special game state is completed. Although it is necessary to sequentially execute the variable display in the main, even if the second variable display in which the variable time is set in the first variable state is taken over even after the first special game state ends (first special If the second variation time set in the first variation state is still long, the second There is a concern that the second variable display will not end for a long time in the variable state, and the game will not progress (in some cases, it may be necessary to have a hall official reset it).

Further, even when shifting from the second variable state to the first variable state, the first variable display is taken over even if the first variable time set in the second variable state is transferred to the first variable state, so that the first variable display is displayed. There is a concern that the game will not be completed for a long time and the game will not progress.

In this regard, it is taught that the first special game state and the second special game state occur in one of the first and second variable displays, as in this means A-7. In this case, the other variable display is forcibly stopped (forcibly terminated) in a manner to teach the deviation, so that the state transition between the first variable state and the second variable state is straddled as described above. By taking over the variable time in , it is possible to avoid a situation in which the variable display is not finished and the game is delayed.

Further, for example, in the second lottery in the second support state, (almost) every time, either the first special game state or the second special game state is elected, so that the first fluctuation display is performed. can be forcibly terminated (almost) every time, and the time for the next first variable display can be newly set. Therefore, in the second support state, even if the time of the first variable display is not set to be very long, if it is set to be slightly longer than the second variable display that starts (almost) at the same time, As long as the second variable display is being performed, the first variable display will not normally be stopped. Therefore, it is possible to reliably avoid a situation in which the first variable display is stop-displayed in the second support state against the player's intention. Furthermore, even if the configuration is such that the first variable display is retained and stored, in the second support state, the suspension of the first variable display is eliminated ( erasure). Therefore, in the second support state, if the suspension of the first variable display is completely exhausted as described above, even if the game is interrupted, the first variable display is executed in the second support state and the first variable display is performed. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the result of the lottery for winning is reflected. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the user wants to leave the seat in the second support state but finds it difficult to leave the seat due to the fact that the first variable display is executed, thereby improving convenience. .

Note that, for example, if an upper limit is set for the number of times variable display is performed in the first support state or the second support state, the count of the number of times of variation is updated when variable display is stopped (not when variable display is started). It may be configured such that the variable display that is processed and is forcibly stopped is not counted. In other words, the variable display that is forcibly stop-displayed is stop-displayed in a mode corresponding to the loss regardless of the result of the corresponding win-fail lottery (the result of the win-fail lottery is not reflected, and is substantially erased). Therefore, it is not included in the variable display count. As a result, for example, in the second support state, the first variable display is counted as a variable display (not only the second variable display, but also the first variable display consumes the remaining number of times). ), and only the second variable display can be performed for the upper limit number of times with a higher probability.

Means A-8. When one of the first variable display and the second variable display is statically displayed and the other variable display is performed, the first variable display is performed in the one variable display. When it is taught that the special game state and the second special game state will occur,
The other variable display is interrupted, and after the end of the first special game state or the second special game state taught in the one variable display, the interrupted other variable display is executed from the beginning. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-6, characterized by:

According to the means A-8, while adopting a method of interrupting the variable display instead of forcibly stopping (forcibly terminating) the variable display as in the above-described means A-7, the interrupted variable display is interrupted. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the work is done half-heartedly. That is, the interrupted variable display is restarted from the beginning after the end of the special game state. The connection becomes poor (the flow of the variable display is not understood), or, for example, the variable display ends immediately after the variable display with 1 second remaining is resumed, and the player cannot grasp what has happened. It is possible to avoid situations such as confusion and confusion.

Furthermore, there is no resistance to game characteristics such as the disappearance of the variable display, such as when one of the first variable display and the second variable display is stopped for teaching the special game state and the other variable display is forcibly terminated. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a certain player harbors disgust and suspicion.

Means A-9. When detection is performed by the first start-up ball detection means and the second start-up ball detection means, the first success-or-failure related information related to the first lottery and the second lottery, and Variation information including information indicating the second success/failure related information and the first variation time and the second variation time is stored, and the first success/failure lottery or the second success/failure lottery is performed based on the variation information. In addition to determining the variation pattern of the first variable display or the second variable display,
In the winning lottery performed by the second special game generating means, either the second special game state or the first special game state is always won,
The second variable display and the first variable display are performed a specified number of times in the second variable state, so that the transition from the second variable state to the first variable state is performed,
The gaming machine according to means A-8, wherein a variation pattern is set again based on the corresponding variation information, and the interrupted variation display is derived from the set variation pattern.

According to the means A-9, for example, when the second variation display is stopped in a mode for teaching the occurrence of the second special game state or the first special game state, the interrupted first variation The change pattern of the display is set again, and in the second lottery, either the second special game state or the first special game state is always won, so the second change state is changed to the first change state. Even if the transition is made, the first variation time (remaining time) of the first variation display that has already been executed is long and does not end for a while (if the first variation time is very long, it should be reset by a person involved in the game hall). It is possible to avoid situations such as

For this reason, it is possible to avoid an error state when switching from the second variation state to the first variation state, and to cause some disadvantages to the player when canceling the error state. It is possible to avoid situations such as erasing of the variable display that had been displayed, and troubling the people involved in the game hall. Therefore, even if the upper limit is set for the second variation state, it is possible to switch from the second variation state to the first variation state successfully, and the degree of freedom in designing the second variation state is improved (for example, the second variation Adjustments are made so that the first special game state is won almost before the state ends, and there is no need to change the game state across the first special game state.

Furthermore, when the state related to the setting of the variable display is changed between the game state before the first special game state and the game state after the first special game state, the continuation of the variable display before the first special game state is changed to the first special game state. It is possible to avoid a situation in which matching is not achieved by performing the game as it is after the game state. For example, when the state before the first special game state is the second variable state and the first variable state is provided after the first special game state is finished, the variable time of the interrupted first variable display is shortened. If resetting is not performed, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the first variation time is long and an error state occurs.

It should be noted that the variation pattern in the special display means may be such that a constant variation pattern is repeated except for the mode of stop display. In this case, simplification of control and the like can be achieved.

Means A-10. A first variable time determination table for determining the first variable time includes a first middle variable time determination table and a first short variable time determination table referred to in the first variable state, and a first short variable time determination table in the second variable state. A first long fluctuation time determination table to be referenced,
The second variation time determination table for determining the second variation time includes a second short variation time determination table referred to in the second variation state and a second long variation time determination table referred to in the first variation state. and
In the second variation state, when the first variation display for teaching the occurrence of the first special game state is started, the first variation time of the first variation display is determined in the first middle variation time determination table. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-9, wherein the first short variation time determination table (or the dedicated first variation time determination table) is referred to. .

In general, one of the first special display means and the second special display means is used to avoid duplicate special game states being derived by the first special display means and the second special display means. On the other hand, it is configured not to newly start the variable display when the variable display instructing the occurrence of the special game state is being performed. Therefore, when the first variable display for teaching the occurrence of the first special game state is started in the second variable state, the second variable display cannot be performed, and the first variable display cannot be performed. If one variation time is long, there is a concern that the game cannot be progressed.

In this regard, in this means A-10, even in the second variation state, when the first variation display for teaching the occurrence of the first special game state is started, the first variation of the first variation display By avoiding setting a long time, the first variable display can be ended relatively early, the first special game state can be generated, and the above problem can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered, causing a decrease in interest and a sense of distrust, and at the same time, for example, when an error cancellation operation is required, the trouble of the person involved in the game hall increases. Such situations can be avoided.

Means A-11. A first variable time determination table for determining the first variable time includes a first middle variable time determination table and a first short variable time determination table referred to in the first variable state, and a first short variable time determination table in the second variable state. A first long fluctuation time determination table to be referenced,
The second variation time determination table for determining the second variation time includes a second short variation time determination table referred to in the second variation state and a second long variation time determination table referred to in the first variation state. and
In the first variation state, when the second variation display for teaching the occurrence of the first special game state is started, the second variation time of the second variation display is determined by the second short variation time determination table (or the dedicated second variable time determination table) is referred to, the gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-10.

In general, one of the first special display means and the second special display means is used to avoid duplicate special game states being derived by the first special display means and the second special display means. On the other hand, it is configured not to newly start the variable display when the variable display instructing the occurrence of the special game state is being performed. Therefore, in the first variation state, when the second variation display that teaches the winning of the first special game state is started, the first variation display cannot be performed, and the second variation display of the second variation display is disabled. If the 2-variation time is too long, there is a concern that the game will not be able to progress.

In this regard, in this means A-11, even in the first variation state, when the second variation display for teaching the occurrence of the first special game state is started, the second variation of the second variation display By avoiding setting a long time, the second variable display can be ended relatively early, the first special game state can be generated, and the above problem can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being hindered, causing a decrease in interest and a sense of distrust, and at the same time, for example, when an error cancellation operation is required, the trouble of the person involved in the game hall increases. Such situations can be avoided.

In addition, when the game ends in the normal game state, it can be understood that the variable display performed by the second special display means is not the first special game state (if you ask a person involved in the game hall, it is the first special game state). (If you have won the game, you will be told that the display should be stopped). loss can also be reduced.

In addition, "when the second variable display is not performed in the first variable state, the guidance display for guiding the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means can be derived. ” may be used. In other words, in general, when the first special game state is won in the win-or-fail lottery for the second variable display, the type is more advantageous for the player than when the first special game state is won in the win-or-fail lottery for the first variable display. is configured to be easily selected. For this reason, for example, even if a ball is entered in the second starting ball entry means in the first variation state, if the first special game state is won, the second variation display will be stopped and displayed relatively quickly. Therefore, unfairness occurs between the player who enters the game ball into the second starting ball entry means (try to start the second variation display in the first variation state) and the unfamiliar player. There is concern that In this regard, such concerns can be dispelled by deriving the guide display. Also, with this configuration, it is possible to enhance performance and playability.

Furthermore, "when the second variation display is performed in the first variation state and the game ball is detected at a position where it cannot be entered into the first start ball entry means, the first start It may be configured to be capable of deriving guidance information that encourages the player to enter the ball into the ball-entering means. In this case, even if the game ball is entered into the second start ball entry means, the second variation display is not digested, and the second start ball entry means is aimed at the game ball to be shot. can be discontinued to prevent the loss of the player.

Means A-12. During the execution of the first variable display, in the first special game state and the second special game state, when the first start-up ball detection means detects, the corresponding to the detection The first variable display is retained and stored up to a predetermined number of times as an upper limit,
During the execution of the second variable display, in the first special game state and the second special game state, when the detection of the second start ball detection means is performed, the corresponding to the detection The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-11, wherein the second variable display is not retained and stored.

Corresponding to the above means A-7, "During execution of the second variation display, when the second start ball detection means is detected in the first special game state and the second special game state , the second variable display corresponding to the detection is not retained, or the second variable display corresponding to the detection is retained and stored up to one time."

When the game ends, it is often in the first variation state, and even if the second variation display is suspended in the first variation state, it is set to a considerably long time unless it is shifted to the second variation state. It is necessary to wait a long time until the end of the given second variation time. Therefore, even if the suspension of the second variable display remains, the game is finished with the suspension of the second variable display.

In this respect, according to this means A-12, when the game is terminated in the first variation state (the second variation display is not retained and stored), the second variation display being executed remains. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling worse when the game ends.

In particular, when adopting the configuration of the means A-11, it is possible to grasp that the second variable display being executed does not correspond to the first special game state, so that the player's image when the game ends. It is possible to more reliably suppress the situation in which the deterioration of Furthermore, after the player finishes the game, another player starts the game, and when the first special game state occurs in the first variation state, the player who was playing the game earlier It is possible to prevent a situation in which the user has suspicion that it is the variable display that he has put on hold or troubles.

In addition, for example, in the first variation state, confirming the pending storage of the second variation display (so-called, look ahead), if the first special game state is won, the first special game state It is also conceivable to set the second variation time of all the second variation displays to the second variation display corresponding to the relatively short, but in this case, if the second variation time is not set relatively short, it is possible to hold It is determined that the displayed second variable display does not correspond to the first special game state. For this reason, the larger the number that can be reserved for the second variation display, the more the number of reserved second variation displays that are not surely won in the first special game state when the second variation state is reached. Fluctuation display will be digested. As a result, the player may be offended, so it is desirable that the suspension of the second variable display is as small as possible.

In addition, as for the first variable display, it is possible to hold and store the display, thereby improving the playability and performance in the normal game state and the first support state.

Even if the second variable display is not retained and stored, the first variable time is set long in the second variable state. Suppressing a situation in which variable display is performed and the distribution ratio of the type of the first special game state that is distributed when the first special game state is won is disadvantageous (when adopting the configuration of the above means A-7, Except when the first variable display wins the first special game state in the first rotation when the second variable state is started).

In addition, by making it possible to suspend the second variable display, the second variable display retained and stored during the first special game state can be derived immediately after the first special game state. Therefore, the period in which the second variable display is not performed in the second variable state can be minimized, and the first variable display and the second variable display are displayed in the second variable state immediately after the first special game state. If both correspond to the first special game state, it is possible to give priority to the second variable display.

Means A-13. A second variation time determination table for determining the second variation time comprises a second long variation time determination table referenced in the first variation state,
of means A-1 to A-12, characterized in that when the second long fluctuation time determination table is referred to, one of a plurality of the second fluctuation times having different lengths is selected. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to means A-13, there are a plurality of patterns of the length of the second variable display when the long pattern is selected, and it is possible to make it difficult to grasp when the second variable display of the long pattern ends. That is, for example, even if the second variable display of the long pattern is started, if the second variable display ends within the business hours of the game hall and the second variable display is performed, , In the case of a configuration that always occurs in either the first special game state or the second special game state, the second variation display is started by entering the game ball into the second start ball entry means in the first variation state. After that, it waits without shooting the game ball, and shoots the game ball so that the game ball can enter the second variable ball entry means in accordance with the timing when the second variable display of the long pattern ends. If so, an opportunity to generate the first special game state can be obtained effectively without running out of balls.

In this regard, as in this means, there are a plurality of patterns of the second variable time of the second variable display of the long pattern, so that the game ball is shot in accordance with the opening of the second variable ball entry means as described above, It is possible to suppress the situation in which the first special game state is efficiently targeted and the difference between the player and the player who does not perform such action widens.

In the first variable state, the opening time of the second variable ball-entering means is shortened, or the game ball entering the second variable ball-entering means is not necessarily entered into the specific ball-entering section. In this way, the above concern can be suppressed.

Means A-14. It is started (at the same time as the start) with the start of the variable display of the first special display means and the second special display means, and the end of the variable display of the first special display means and the second special display means. effect display means capable of deriving a effect display that ends with (with the end)
Said first special game generating means, and sub-control means for controlling said effect display means based on information from said second special game generating means,
The effect display means is configured to be capable of deriving a first variable effect display corresponding to the variable display of the first special display means and a second variable corresponding effect display corresponding to the variable display of the second special display means. and the first variation corresponding effect display or the second variation corresponding effect display corresponding to whichever of the first variable display and the second variable display is stop-displayed first. The gaming machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-13, wherein is derived.

According to the means A-14, performance can be improved by performing the variation-adaptive effect display, which is a display for effect corresponding to the variable display. Also, the first special display means and the second special display means are directly visually recognized, and the effect display means simultaneously derives the variation corresponding effect display respectively corresponding to the first variable display and the second variable display. In such a case, there is a concern that the display may become cluttered and it may not be possible to know which one will be stopped and displayed first, which may hinder the excitement. In this regard, in the present means, the effect display is basically performed in correspondence with the variable display whose result is taught first, out of the first variable display and the second variable display. By visually recognizing the means, the player can certainly enjoy the effect of teaching the result of the winning lottery corresponding to the first variable display and the second variable display.

Incidentally, when the second variable display for teaching the occurrence of the first special game state is performed in the first variable state as in means A-9 and means A-10, the effect display means displays the second variable display. When the corresponding effect display is performed and the first variable display for teaching the occurrence of the first special game state is performed in the second variable state, the effect display means performs the effect display corresponding to the first variable display. You can do it. In this case, if the player visually recognizes the performance display means, the effect of being able to grasp the trend of the game can be achieved more reliably.

Also, in the first variation state, a second variation display that does not correspond to the first special game state is performed, or in the second variation state, a first variation display that does not correspond to the first special game state is performed. In this case, the effect display corresponding to such variable display may not be performed. In this case, since the effect display means is performing the effect variable display corresponding to the variable display that does not end easily, the new starting ball entering means refrains from entering the game ball, or the first variation. By continuing to perform the second effect variable display in the state, it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is difficult to leave the seat.

Means A-15. The first special game generating means is configured to perform the first winning lottery and the second winning lottery based on the detection of the first starting ball entry detecting means,
During the execution of the second variable display, in the first special game state and the second special game state, when the detection of the second start ball detection means is performed, the corresponding to the detection The second variable display is retained and stored up to a predetermined number of times as an upper limit,
In the first variation state, when the second winning lottery is won based on the detection of the first start-up ball detection means, the first variable display for teaching that the second winning lottery has been won Along with the stop display, the second variable display is forcibly stopped and displayed in a manner of teaching a disconnection, and the second variable time of the second variable display performed after the end of the second special game state is set to the The second variable time determination table is configured to refer to a second variable time determination table in which the second variable time is set shorter than the second variable time determination table referred to when setting the second variable time in the first variable state. The game machine according to any one of means A-1 to A-14, characterized in that

According to the means A-15, when the second special game state is reached based on the winning lottery for the first variation display in the first variation state, the second variation display after the second special game state The fluctuation time is set to be particularly short in spite of being in the first fluctuation state. That is, if the second variation time is short, as in the second variation state, the second special game state is generated, the game ball is entered into the second variable ball entry means, and the ball is entered into the specific ball entry section. You can get the opportunity to generate the first special game state based on. Therefore, it is possible to add a game feature such that a game like the second variation state is performed in spite of being in the first variation state. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the production and suppress monotonous feeling, and as a result, it is possible to improve the entertainment.

B. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a shooting means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is to be generated. The variable display means performs a variable display for teaching the result of the lottery (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2006-271480).

In addition, in the pachinko machine, it is possible to change the ease with which game balls enter the starting ball entry means, change the probability of entering a special game state, or change the special game state that is more advantageous for the player in the special game state. Attempts have been made to diversify the playability by changing the rate at which states are selected, etc., but all of them have become monotonous, and there is a demand for more diversified playability.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving game playability.

Means B-1. a game area in which a game ball shot by the shooting device is guided;
A first starting ball entering means and a second starting ball entering means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area;
a first starting ball entry detection means capable of detecting a gaming ball that has entered the first starting ball entry means;
a second starting ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the second starting ball entry means;
Variable ball entry means (first variable ball entry means and second variable entry means);
Whether or not to generate a special game state (first special game state) for opening the variable ball entry means (first variable ball entry means) when detection is performed by the first start ball entry detection means. A first special game generation means for performing the (first) winning lottery and generating the special game state (first special game state) when the (first) winning lottery is won;
A first special display means for performing a first variable display with a first special symbol for teaching the result of the (first) lottery performed by the first special game generating means;
A special game state (second 2 special game state; a so-called small win) is performed by performing a (second) lottery to determine whether or not to generate the (generate the first special game state when winning the first lottery); (Second) second special game generation means for generating the special game state (the second special game state) when winning the lottery;
A second special display means for performing a second variable display by a second special symbol that teaches the results of the (first winning lottery and the second winning lottery) performed by the second special game generating means (,
a specific ball entry section into which the game ball entered by the second variable ball entry means can be entered;
a specific ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry section;
an accessory special game state generating means for generating the first special game state when detection by the specific ball-entering detection means is performed;
The first variable display in the first special display means and the second variable display in the second special display means can be executed in parallel,
one of the first variable display and the second variable display is configured to be changeable between a low state in which the number of executions per predetermined time tends to decrease and a high state in which the number of executions tends to increase more than the low state,
a first variation time determination table referred to when determining the first variation time of the first variation display;
a second variation time determination table that is referred to when determining the second variation time of the second variation display;
The first variation time determination table includes a low state first variation time determination table that is referred to in the low state, and a high state first variation time determination table that is referred to in the high state. and
The second fluctuation time determination table includes a low state second fluctuation time determination table referred to in the low state and a high state second variation time determination table referred to in the high state. and
The high state first fluctuation time determination table and the high state second fluctuation time determination table are each provided with a plurality of pattern correspondence tables (for winning, for losing, etc.), and the (first The pattern correspondence table to be referred to is determined according to the results of the winning lottery and the second winning lottery,
At least one of the pattern correspondence tables of the high state first fluctuation time determination table and the high state second fluctuation time determination table contains a plurality of different allocations of the length of the selected fluctuation time. A level table is provided,
A level determination that determines which of the level correspondence tables is referred to in determining the first variation time and the second variation time in the high state when the high state is granted. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to perform processing.

According to the means B-1, in the high state, for example, when it is assumed that the first variable display and the second variable display are continuously variable and displayed, the number of times of the first variable display per predetermined time and the number of the second variable display It is possible to change the ratio between the variable display and the number of times. In other words, for example, in the case of a configuration in which it is advantageous for the player to win the special game state in the second variable display, it is desirable to perform the second variable display without performing the first variable display as much as possible. become. Therefore, regarding the setting of the first variable time and the second variable time, a plurality of level correspondence tables are provided in which the length of the variable time to be selected is different, and at the beginning of the high state, the second variable time can be referred to in the high state. To prepare a plurality of high states with different advantages for a player, even though they are all high states, only by determining the combination of one variable time determination table and a second variable time determination table. can be done. As a result, while suppressing complication of control, it is possible to add depth to the game and to diversify the effects, thereby suppressing monotony and improving interest. In particular, when an upper limit is set for the number of times the variable display is performed in the high state, the first variable display is performed even if the first variable display as the undesirable variable display is not won. (the proportion of the second variable display that can be performed relatively decreases), so this effect becomes more pronounced.

Further, once the level determination process is performed when the high state is given, which of the plurality of level correspondence tables is referred to when setting each of the first variable display and the second variable display in the subsequent high state. It is possible to omit the trouble of selecting one by lottery or the like, and it is possible to simplify the control when setting each variable display.

It should be noted that "in the high state, by shooting a game ball aiming at one of the first starting ball entering means and the second starting ball entering means, the game ball can also enter the other. ” may be used. In this case, in the high state, it is possible to establish the above-described game characteristics such that the high state is divided into levels according to the difference between the pitches at which the first variable display and the second variable display are performed.

In addition, the level determination process is performed only when the high state is provided after the first special game state that was won in the low state (the level determined when the predetermined high state is provided is , until the predetermined high state ends, or until a high state other than the predetermined high state or a low probability state is given, is reflected as a table that is referred to when determining the fluctuation time, or , When a predetermined high state is granted, the first special game state in which the predetermined high state is granted after that continues (Occurrence of the first special game state of other types, the above-mentioned predetermined It is possible to decide up to the level when it occurs) without inserting a game state other than the high state of), or to the first special game state in which the high state is given after the end of the first special game state It may be performed when winning (every time, every predetermined number of times, or randomly, such as when winning in a predetermined lottery). Furthermore, when adopting the latter configuration, the sorting of the level correspondence table selected in the level determination process is made different according to the game state at the stage when the occurrence of the first special game state in which the high state is given is determined. can be configured to For example, it may be configured such that when winning in the low state, it is easier for the player to select a high state with an advantageous level than in the case of winning in the high state, or a specific game state is selected in the high state. may be set so that when winning in the particular game state, a high level state advantageous to the player is likely to be selected.

Factors that increase or decrease the number of times the variable display is executed per predetermined period of time include the length of the variable time period, the ease of winning a prize in the starting winning means that triggers the variable display, and the like. For example, instead of "low state" and "high state", "ease of entering a game ball to one of the first start ball entry means and the second start ball entry means" By changing, a "low ball entry state" in which a game ball can be entered in one direction, and a "high ball entry state" in which a game ball is easier to enter in one direction than in the low ball entry state. be configured to be able to change state at any time”.

Means B-2. a plurality of level correspondence tables for at least one of the pattern correspondence tables of the high state first fluctuation time determination table and at least one of the pattern correspondence tables of the high state second fluctuation time determination table; provided,
In the high state, it is possible to execute a level suggesting effect suggesting a combination of the level correspondence table that can be referred to when setting the first variation time and the level correspondence table that can be referred to when setting the second variation time. The gaming machine according to means B-1, characterized in that it is configured to:

According to the means B-2, it is possible to enjoy guessing what the level of the high state is.

Means B-3. Sub control means capable of executing control based on signals from the first special game generating means and the second special game generating means;
Directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means, the first special display means, and effect display means capable of deriving the effect display related to the variable display of the second special display means,
The effect display means is configured to be able to derive a first variation corresponding effect display corresponding to the first variable display and a second change corresponding effect display corresponding to the second variable display,
Of the first variation display and the second variation display, at least the special game state (the first special game state that may change state between the high probability state and the low probability state) The game machine according to means B-1 or B-2, wherein the first variation corresponding effect display or the second variation corresponding effect display corresponding to the variable display that teaches the generation of is derived. .

According to the means B-3, the results of the (first win/fail lottery and second) win/fail lottery are reliably taught by the variable display of the first special display means and the second special display means, and It is possible to more dramatically convey through the first variation corresponding performance display and the second variation corresponding performance display performed by the performance display means corresponding to the variation display of the first special display means and the second special display means. In addition, in the first variation corresponding performance display and the second variation corresponding performance display, by performing a display such as a supplementary explanation, it is possible to make it easier to understand how the result of the lottery will be and what will happen from now on. You can enjoy the game more.

In addition, since the effect display of the effect display means is nothing more than a effect, in the high state, the display mode of the effect display of the effect display means is either the first variation corresponding effect display or the second change corresponding effect display. It may be configured such that it cannot be determined. Also, the timings of starting and ending the first variation-compatible effect display and the second variation-compatible effect display, the first variable display, and the second variable display do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

In addition, "out of the first variation corresponding effect display and the second variation corresponding effect display, the first effect display state in which the first variation corresponding effect display is derived and the second change corresponding effect display are derived and a mixed effect display state in which both the first variation-corresponding effect display and the second variation-corresponding effect display are derived." good. Furthermore, "when the state changes from one of the first effect display state and the second effect display state to the other, and when the fake effect of the state change is performed, the transition to the mixed effect state is performed. ” may be used.

Means B-4. In the effect display means, at least a first remaining time display suggesting the remaining time of the first variable time and a second remaining time display suggesting the remaining time of the second variable time. A gaming machine according to means B-3, characterized in that one of them is derivable.

In recent years, it is common to have a configuration in which it is more advantageous to win in relation to the other than to win in relation to one of the first variable display and the second variable display. According to -4, which of the first variable display and the second variable display is stopped first can be grasped from the remaining time display. For this reason, in addition to the result of the lottery, the timing of the stop display of the first variable display and the second variable display is interesting with the feeling that the other variable display should be stopped and displayed as soon as possible. can be found, and the performance and game performance can be improved.

It should be noted that the first remaining time display and the second remaining time display may be configured to be able to suggest the remaining time of the variable display that teaches the occurrence of the special game state. In addition, the case of winning the special game state in the winning lottery performed by the second special game generating means is better than the case of winning the special game state in the winning lottery performed by the first special game generating means. , in a configuration in which the player is likely to be sorted into the type of the special game state that is advantageous to the player, at least the remaining time of the first variable display out of the first variable display and the second variable display is set. The suggested remaining time display may be configured to be derivable. Furthermore, for example, in the first variation corresponding effect display and the second variation corresponding effect display, a result display effect in which the result of the corresponding variable display is suggested/taught, and a climax effect performed immediately before the result display effect. The climax effect is started in one of the first variation corresponding effect display and the second variation corresponding effect display (which may be limited to the one that is advantageous when winning the special game state). In this case, the result display effect may be performed before the other, and the corresponding variable display may be stopped and displayed. In this case, when the climax effect is started, it is possible to grasp which of the first variable display and the second variable display is stop-displayed first, so that the user can enjoy the climax effect while concentrating. .

Means B-5. Sub control means capable of executing control based on signals from the first special game generating means and the second special game generating means;
A first sub-display means and a second sub-display means directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means,
The first sub-display means is arranged adjacent to the first special display means and has a display section similar to the display section for performing the first variable display of the first special display means,
The second sub-display means is arranged adjacent to the second special display means and has a display section similar to the display section for performing the second variable display of the second special display means. The game machine according to means B-3 or B-4 characterized by:

No matter how much the effect is produced by the effect display means, if the first and second variable displays are visually recognized, a special game state will occur (even if one is in the process of variable display and the other is suspended). However, since the other is not variably displayed, it is known that the special game state is taught by one variative display), the type of the special game state, and the effect display are the first variability display and the first variability display. Which one of the two variable displays is supported is grasped.

In this regard, according to the means B-5, it becomes difficult to understand which display modes are the first special display means and the second special display means, and furthermore, it becomes difficult to understand the confirmation display pattern of the main display means. (makes it difficult to make decisions in an instant). Therefore, for example, while visually recognizing the first special display means and the second special display means, a player who tries to play an efficient game based on such information, the first special display means and the second special display means A game result between a player who does not grasp the display means or a player who dares not visually recognize the first special display means and the second special display means because he/she wants to enjoy the effects of the effect display means, etc. (for example, the difference in game value to be finally obtained) can be minimized. In other words, the first special display means and the second special display means are relatively displayed as much as the player who plays the game immediately responds to the display modes of the first special display means and the second special display means. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a player who does not visually recognize the display means loses money. As a result, the patterns of the first special display means and the second special display means are grasped, and the consciousness that if the first special display means and the second special display means are not visually recognized, the loss is suppressed. This allows the user to fully enjoy the effect display and the like of the effect display means.

In addition, in order to make the display modes of the first special display means and the second special display means difficult to understand, a pseudo display is performed by the first sub-display means and the second sub-display means controlled by the sub-control means. I'm doing it. Therefore, for example, in order to make the display modes of the first special display means and the second special display means difficult to understand, the display modes of the first special display means and the second special display means are made more complicated. Compared to the case, it is possible to reduce the control burden of the first special game generating means and the second special game generating means, and to simplify the first special display means and the second special display means. .

Means B-6. setting an upper limit for the number of times the first variable display and the second variable display are performed in the high state;
a remaining number counting means for counting the number of remaining times of the first variable display and the second variable display that can be executed in the high state;
In the high state, the value of the remaining count means is updated when the first variable display and the second variable display are started,
In the high state, the second variable time is set shorter than the first variable time, and
When setting when starting (the first variable display and) the second variable display in the high state, if the variable display is a variable display corresponding to the upper limit in the high state, the second variable time Means B-1 to B-1, characterized in that a dedicated last table in which a time closer to the first fluctuation time in the high state is set is referred to when setting the level correspondence table rather than referring to the level correspondence table. -5 the gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to means B-6, since the remaining number counting means is updated when the variable display is started, during the period from the start to the end of the variable display corresponding to the upper limit of the high state, When one variable display is started, the setting corresponding to the game state when the high state ends can be reliably performed with respect to the other variable display. Therefore, even though the high state has ended, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the variable time corresponding to the high state is set, causing a problem or discomfort. Incidentally, the effect display corresponding to the variable display corresponding to the gaming state after the high state ends may be derived after the effect display corresponding to the variable display corresponding to the high state is stopped and displayed. . In this case, the variable display corresponding to the upper limit of the high state can be more reliably enjoyed.

Further, in the case where the first fluctuation time is set to be long and the second fluctuation time is set to be short in the high state, the fluctuation display corresponding to the upper limit of the high state is the second fluctuation display. When the first variable display is started immediately before the second variable display, the second variable display corresponding to the upper limit is stopped and the high probability state ends, but the first variable There is a concern that the display will not finish for a long time, and that a problem or discomfort will occur.

In this regard, when setting the second variation time corresponding to the upper limit of the high probability state, instead of referring to the level correspondence table, which sets the variation time to be relatively short as before, a special last table is used. By making the second variation time as close to the first variation time as possible, the remaining time of the first variation display of the already started first variation display is too long after the end of the high-probability state. (For example, it is possible to make the remaining time similar to the first variation time of the first variation display in the low-probability state). Therefore, even though the high state has ended, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the variable time corresponding to the high state is set, causing a problem or discomfort.

Means B-7. When one of the first variable display and the second variable display is stopped and displayed, the other variable display is performed, and the special game is performed in the one variable display. When it is taught that the state (the first special game state and the second special game state) will occur,
The other variation display is interrupted, and after the special game state (the first special game state and the second special game state) taught in the one variation display is completed, the interrupted other variation. A game machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-6, wherein the display is resumed from where it was interrupted.

According to the means B-7, in the high probability state, when winning the special game state among the first variation display and the second variation display, the special game state of a type more advantageous to the player is likely to be provided. It is desired that one variable display is sequentially stopped and displayed and the other variable display is not stopped and displayed as much as possible, and the ratio of the number of times the first variable display and the second variable display are performed per predetermined time is different as a result. It is possible to establish game characteristics such as expecting that the level of the high-probability state that continues to increase is favorable. Furthermore, the second variable display is performed while the first variable display is performed once, instead of simply determining which of the first variable display and the second variable display is started at the same time and which is stopped and displayed first. It is possible to give the playability of how many times the game can be played.

Means B-8. When the first start ball detection means and the second start ball detection means are detected, the (first win/fail lottery and the second) win/fail lottery (first win/fail related information and second 2) information acquisition means for acquiring information related to success;
reservation storage means having a storage area capable of storing the (first success-or-failure related information and the second) success-or-failure related information acquired by the information acquisition means;
A pending display means capable of deriving a pending display indicating that the (first and second) success-or-failure related information is stored in the storage area of the pending storage means,
The mode of the pending display corresponding to the predetermined (first win-or-fail related information and second) win-fail related information stored in the pending storage means is the first variable display and the second variable corresponding to the pending display. The gaming machine according to means B-7 is configured to be able to derive a reserved look-ahead effect, which is a specific mode suggesting the content of the display.

According to the means B-8, it is possible to improve performance and the like. For example, the special game state may be won in response to the suspended display of one of the first variable display and the second variable display, which is less desirable for the player to win the special game state. If there is a display that suggests that there is a relatively high possibility that the player is likely to be on the other side of the display, they want the other variable display to hit before that, or if the other variable display reaches a stop display, they want it to come off. It is possible to impart a playfulness, such as making the player concentrate on the game, while strengthening his feelings. In particular, by using the configuration of the above means B-4 together, such a function and effect can be exhibited more remarkably.

As in the above means B-7, even if one of the first variable display and the second variable display is instructed to generate a special game state, the other variable display is only interrupted without being erased. If the special game state is restarted after the end, it is possible to avoid a contradiction even if the reserved prefetch effect is derived as in means B-8.

Means B-9. A plurality of types are provided in the special game state,
Winning the special game state in the winning lottery performed by the second special game generating means is better than winning the special game state in the winning lottery performed by the first special game generating means. , In a configuration that is set with a high possibility of being sorted into the special game state type that is advantageous for the player,
As the first starting ball entry means,
A first normal starting ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter in any state;
In the low state, a game ball cannot enter or is in a closed state in which it is difficult to enter, and in the high state, a game ball can enter or is in an open state in which it is easy to enter. a ball means;
The first support starting ball-entering means is configured to be more likely to be in the open state in the high state than in the low state,
The second starting ball-entering means is configured to make it easier for a game ball to enter than the first normal starting ball-entering means and the first support starting ball-entering means in the closed state,
In the high state, a game ball launched so as to enter the second starting ball entering means can enter the first support starting ball entering means,
Means B-1 to B-8, characterized in that, in the low state, the length of the second variation time for one time is set longer than the sum of the lengths of the first variation time for a plurality of times. The gaming machine according to any one of

According to the means B-9, in the high state, if a game ball is shot aiming at the second starting ball entering means, the game ball can also enter the first support starting ball entering means. Therefore, both the first variable display and the second variable display can be executed. In addition, the high state is realized by increasing the ease with which a game ball enters the first support starting ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from intentionally avoiding the first variable display (executing only the second variable display) in the high state. Further, the second starting ball entry means is configured to relatively easily enter the game ball, and the second variable display can be progressed at a good tempo in the high state, and the exhilarating feeling etc. in the high state can be ensured. be able to. As for the second starting ball entry means, even if the game ball is always easy to enter, the second fluctuation time is long in the low state, so the second fluctuation display is rapidly extinguished in the low state. situation can be avoided.

Further, in a state in which the first variation display and the second variation display are performed in the high probability state, the effect display means performs the first variation corresponding effect display and the second variation corresponding effect display. is derived, but even if it is not possible to distinguish between the first variation corresponding effect display and the second variation corresponding effect display, the first special display By visually recognizing the means and the second special display means, if one of them does not perform the variable display, the one can be determined. In this regard, by providing a configuration for holding and storing the variable display as in the above means B-8, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the variable display is interrupted. Therefore, while referring to the first variation-corresponding effect display and the second variation-corresponding effect display, attention is paid to which of the first change display and the second change display is stop-displayed first. can be

It should be noted that "the first start-up winning device and the second start-up winning device are provided so that a game ball that has entered a ball entry opening into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and and a sorting device that alternately guides game balls entering the ball entry opening to the first start winning device and the second start winning device. In this case, both the first and second variable displays can be variably displayed in parallel, and the act of avoiding only the first variable display while playing a game can be more reliably prevented.

C. There is a pachinko machine as a kind of game machine. In a pachinko machine, when a game ball launched by a shooting means enters a starting ball entry means provided on a game board, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not a special game state advantageous to the player is to be generated. The variable display means performs a variable display for teaching the result of the lottery (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2006-271480).

In addition, in the pachinko machine, it is possible to change the ease with which game balls enter the starting ball entry means, change the probability of entering a special game state, or change the special game state that is more advantageous for the player in the special game state. Attempts have been made to diversify the playability by changing the rate at which states are selected, etc., but all of them have become monotonous, and there is a demand for more diversified playability.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving game playability.

Means C-1. a game area in which a game ball shot by the shooting device is guided;
A first starting ball entering means and a second starting ball entering means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area;
a first starting ball entry detection means capable of detecting a gaming ball that has entered the first starting ball entry means;
a second starting ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the second starting ball entry means;
Variable ball entry means (first variable ball entry means and second variable entry means);
Whether or not to generate a special game state (first special game state) for opening the variable ball entry means (first variable ball entry means) when detection is performed by the first start ball entry detection means. A first special game generation means for performing the (first) winning lottery and generating the special game state (first special game state) when the (first) winning lottery is won;
A first special display means for performing a first variable display with a first special symbol for teaching the result of the (first) lottery performed by the first special game generating means;
A special game state (second 2 special game state; a so-called small win) is performed to determine whether or not to generate a (second) winning lottery, and when the (second) winning lottery is won, the special game state (the second special game state ), a second special game generating means for generating
A second special display means for performing a second variable display by a second special symbol that teaches the results of the (first winning lottery and the second winning lottery) performed by the second special game generating means (,
a specific ball entry section into which the game ball entered by the second variable ball entry means can be entered;
a specific ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry section;
an accessory special game state generating means for generating the first special game state when detection by the specific ball-entering detection means is performed;
The first variable display in the first special display means and the second variable display in the second special display means can be executed in parallel,
Sub control means capable of executing control based on signals from the first special game generating means and the second special game generating means;
Directly or indirectly controlled by the sub-control means, the first special display means, and effect display means capable of deriving the effect display related to the variable display of the second special display means,
The sub-control means controls at least one of a first remaining time display suggesting the remaining time of the first variable time and a second remaining time display suggesting the remaining time of the second variable time in the effect display means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that one remaining time display can be derived.

In recent years, it is common to have a configuration in which it is more advantageous to win in relation to the other than to win in relation to one of the first variable display and the second variable display. According to -1, which of the first variable display and the second variable display is stopped first can be grasped from the remaining time display. Therefore, by looking at the remaining time display, it is possible to anticipate the development of the game based on the time difference between the first variable display and the second variable display, find out the timing of the break, find new pleasures, and improve the convenience of the schedule. You can try to improve. For example, in addition to the result of the lottery, the timing of the stop display of the first variable display and the second variable display makes it interesting with the feeling that the other variable display should be stopped and displayed as soon as possible. It can be found, and the performance and game performance can be improved. Further, by displaying the remaining time, it is possible to provide guidance/explanation or the like that helps the understanding of the game, such as that the first variable display and the second variable display are performed in parallel.

Means C-2. When the special game state occurs based on the detection of the second starting ball entry detection means, the player is more likely than the case where the special game state occurs based on the detection of the first start ball entry detection means. In a configuration where advantageous benefits are easily granted for
Regarding the setting of the first variation time of the first variation display and the second variation time of the second variation display,
a first variation state in which the length of the second variation time for one time is set longer than the sum of the lengths of the first variation time for a plurality of times;
The length of the first variation time for one time is configured to be changeable between a second variation state set longer than the sum of the lengths of the second variation times for a plurality of times. The gaming machine as described in Characteristic means C-1.

According to the means C-2, in a configuration in which the first variable display and the second variable display can be performed in parallel, the second variable time is considerably long (basically, only the first variable display is performed). The state can be changed between a first change state and a second change state in which the first change time is considerably long (basically only the second change display is performed). As a result, for example, in the first variation state for the purpose of causing the first start ball entry means to enter the game ball and execute the first variation display, the normal game state in which the first variation time is the normal length and a first support state in which the first variation time is short and the first variation display can be advanced at a relatively high pitch, and the game ball is entered into the second starting ball entry means. In the second variation state for the purpose of executing the second variation display, it is possible to set a second support state in which the second variation time is short and the second variation display can proceed at a relatively high pitch. (It is also possible to set a game state in which the second variable time is normal). Therefore, three or more game states in which the game characteristics change can be provided without providing a configuration for changing the probability of winning the first special game state in the winning lottery, and as a result, the amusement can be improved. be able to.

For example, in the first support state and the second support state, the probability of winning the first special game state in the winning lottery is always constant by providing a privilege that can suppress the loss of balls. Even if there is, the first support state and the second support state are states in which the ball can be held at least better than in the normal game state, and it is possible to set two game states that are more advantageous for the player than the normal game state. can. Therefore, even if the second support state is not provided after the end of the first special game state, the first support state is provided instead of the normal game state, thereby reducing the disappointment of the player. , It is possible to improve the desire to play.

Moreover, in the first support state, basically, the first special game state cannot be generated unless the player wins in the first win-or-fail lottery. 2. The first special game state can also be generated when a game ball entered in the second variable ball entry means opened based on the winning lottery wins and enters the specific ball entry section. can. In this way, it is possible to firmly provide a difference in terms of advantages for the player between the first support state and the second support state, thereby improving game performance and performance.

Further, as described above, since there are various combinations of the first variable time and the second variable time, by displaying the remaining time indicating the remaining time of the first variable time and the second variable time, , more diverse productions can be performed. In addition, the remaining time display has the further effect of helping the player to understand the game.

Means C-3. In the state where the first variable display and the second variable display are performed in the second variable state, the first variable display in the second variable state is the normal game state and the second variable display. The gaming machine according to means C-2, wherein the game machine is configured to be able to derive a guidance display that teaches that the first variation time is longer than the first variation time in the 1 variation state.

When the game is played in the second variable state, the first variable display is also stopped (interrupted or erased) along with the second variable display, so the first variable display is lengthened. It is conceivable that some players do not notice this. For this reason, there is a concern that the user will become overly anxious about not interrupting the second variable display in the second variable state. In this respect, as in means C-3, by teaching that the first fluctuation time in the second fluctuation state is long and understanding that there is not much trouble even if the start of the second fluctuation display is delayed, some The game can be played in a relaxed manner, and the comfort in the game can be improved, for example, by releasing the hand from the shooting operation means for shooting the game ball.

Means C-4. Teaching the first variation time of the first variation display being executed in the second variation state in which only the first variation display is being performed out of the first variation display and the second variation display. Alternatively, the game machine according to means C-2 or C-3 is configured to be able to derive a suggestible remaining time display.

Even if the first variation time of the second variation state is set long and there is enough time for the restroom, purchase of beverages, etc., it is conceivable that the user cannot leave the seat due to anxiety. In this respect, according to the means C-4, since the remaining time display that teaches or suggests the remaining time of the first fluctuation time in the second fluctuation state can be derived, confirming the remaining time display, You can leave your seat with peace of mind. Therefore, convenience can be improved.

Means C-5. A performance operation means that can be operated by a player is provided,
The game machine according to means C-4, wherein the remaining time display can be derived and deleted according to the operation of the effect operation means.

According to the means C-5, a player who does not plan to leave the seat and feels that the display of the remaining time is an eyesore while continuing the game can erase the display of the remaining time, and wants to see it again after erasing it. can be displayed again.

Means C-6. The main control means comprising the first special game generating means and the second special game generating means,
Acquisition of information for acquiring first win/fail related information and second win/fail related information related to the lottery when the first start ball entry detection means and the second start ball entry detection means are detected. means and
holding storage means having a storage area capable of storing the first right/failure related information acquired by the information acquisition means and the second right/failure related information;
The main control means determines the first variation time or the second variation time when the information acquisition means acquires the first success-or-failure related information or the second success-or-failure related information, configured to output the first success/failure related information or the second success/failure related information including information on the first variable time and the second variable time to the sub-control means;
The sub-controller is
Suspended look-ahead suggesting the content of the first variable display or the second variable display, which corresponds to the predetermined first success-or-failure-related information or the second success-or-failure-related information stored in the reservation storage means, regarding the success or failure lottery performance, and
The first variable display corresponding to the predetermined first right/fail related information or the second right/fail related information stored in the holding storage means, or the first variable time of the second variable display, and the second The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-5, characterized in that the remaining time display can be derived in consideration of two variable times.

According to means C-6, it is possible to suggest not only the variable display that is currently being displayed, but also the content of the variable display that is retained and stored. It is possible to improve performance and the like. Furthermore, by combining the remaining time display including the withheld variable display and the suggestion of the content of the lottery of the withheld variable display, etc., the information that the player can obtain increases, and based on this, You can enjoy playing games.

Means C-7. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-6, wherein a plurality of the first remaining time displays can be derived simultaneously.

According to means C-7, a plurality of first remaining time displays indicating the same object are derived to increase the reliability of the first remaining time display, or a plurality of first remaining time displays indicating different objects are derived. can give more information.

Means C-8. The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-7, wherein a plurality of second remaining time displays can be derived simultaneously.

According to means C-8, a plurality of second remaining time displays indicating the same object are derived to increase the reliability of the second remaining time display, or a plurality of second remaining time displays indicating different objects are derived. can give more information.

Means C-9. A gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-8, wherein a plurality of said effect display means capable of displaying said remaining time display are provided.

According to the means C-9, the remaining time display can be derived to a plurality of effect display means to clarify the difference in meaning, etc., and can be displayed in a cool manner, and the remaining time display in the predetermined effect display means. can be displayed on another effect display means (displayed collectively), etc., when it becomes an obstacle. Therefore, it is possible to improve designability, improve convenience, and the like.

It should be noted that it is also possible to combine the respective technical matters described in the means A, means B, and means C as appropriate.

The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

a. The game machine in each of the above means is a pinball game machine. As a more detailed example of the aspect, "an operating means (game ball shooting handle) operated by a player, a shooting means (shooting motor, etc.) for flipping and shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the shooting means. A pinball game machine provided with a game area where a game ball is guided and each ball entry means (general prize winning device, variable prize winning device, operation opening, etc.) arranged in the game area.

b. The game machine in each of the above means is a pinball game machine having a game area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed example of the aspect, "an operating means (game ball shooting handle) operated by a player, a shooting means (shooting motor, etc.) for flipping and shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the shooting means. A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is composed of a game board surface, etc.) that guides the game balls and extends along a substantially vertical direction, and each ball entry means (general winning device, variable winning device, operation port, etc.), and configured to enable visual recognition of the behavior of the game ball flowing down the game area.

c. The game machine or each pinball game machine in each of the above means is a pachinko machine or a game machine conforming to a pachinko machine.

10... Pachinko machine 32... Variable winning device 33a... First starting winning device 33b... Second starting winning device 34... Through gate 42... Decorative pattern display device 43a... First special display device 43b... Second 2 special display devices, 261 ... main control device, 262 ... sub-control device.

The gaming machine of the present invention is
a game area in which a game ball shot by the shooting device is guided;
a first starting ball-entering means and a second starting ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area;
a first starting ball entry detection means capable of detecting a gaming ball that has entered the first starting ball entry means;
a second starting ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the second starting ball entry means ;
When the detection by the first start ball entry detection means is performed, a first win-or-fail lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate the first special game state, and the above corresponding to the case where the first win-or-fail lottery is won. a first special game generating means for generating a first special game state;
a first display means for executing a first display capable of teaching the result of the first winning lottery performed by the first special game generating means;
A second winning lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a second special game state when detection is performed by the second starting ball entry detecting means, and the second special lottery is performed when the second winning lottery is won. a second special game generating means for generating a game state;
a second display means for executing a second display capable of teaching the result of the second lottery performed by the second special game generation means.

Claims (1)

a game area in which a game ball shot by the shooting device is guided;
A first starting ball entering means and a second starting ball entering means capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area;
a first starting ball entry detection means capable of detecting a gaming ball that has entered the first starting ball entry means;
a second starting ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the second starting ball entry means;
variable ball entry means configured to be able to change state between an open state in which a game ball moving in the game area can be entered and a closed state in which the ball cannot be entered;
When the detection by the first starting ball entry detection means is performed, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to generate a special game state for opening the variable ball entry means, and the winning lottery is won. a first special game generating means for generating the special game state in
a first special display means for performing a first variable display with a first special symbol for teaching the result of the winning lottery performed by the first special game generating means;
When the detection by the second starting ball entry detection means is performed, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to generate a special game state for opening the variable ball entry means, and the winning lottery is won. a second special game generating means for generating the special game state in
a second special display means for performing a second variable display with a second special symbol for teaching the result of the winning lottery performed by the second special game generating means;
The first variable display in the first special display means and the second variable display in the second special display means can be executed in parallel,
one of the first variable display and the second variable display is configured to be changeable between a low state in which the number of executions per predetermined time tends to decrease and a high state in which the number of executions tends to increase more than the low state,
a first variation time determination table referred to when determining the first variation time of the first variation display;
a second variation time determination table that is referred to when determining the second variation time of the second variation display;
The first variation time determination table includes a low state first variation time determination table that is referred to in the low state, and a high state first variation time determination table that is referred to in the high state. and
The second fluctuation time determination table includes a low state second fluctuation time determination table referred to in the low state and a high state second variation time determination table referred to in the high state. and
A plurality of pattern correspondence tables are provided in the high state first fluctuation time determination table and the high state second fluctuation time determination table, respectively, and the pattern correspondence is referred to according to the result of the lottery. configured to determine the table,
At least one of the pattern correspondence tables of the high state first fluctuation time determination table and the high state second fluctuation time determination table contains a plurality of different allocations of the length of the selected fluctuation time. A level table is provided,
A level determination that determines which of the level correspondence tables is referred to in determining the first variation time and the second variation time in the high state when the high state is granted. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to perform processing.

Images